Sharp LL-T2000 Instruction manual

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ALL MODE MULTI-BAND TRANSCEIVER
TS-2000
TS-2000X
TS-B2000
KENWOOD CORPORATION
© B62-1221-20 (K)
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02
THANK YOU
THANK YOU
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-2000(X)/
TS-B2000 transceiver. It has been developed by a
team of engineers determined to continue the
tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD
transceivers.
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the
items listed in the table. We recommend you keep
the box and packing material below in case you need
to repack the transceiver in the future.
This transceiver features dual Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) units to process IF and AF signals.
By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology,
the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 gives you enhanced
interference reduction capabilities and improves the
quality of audio that you transmit without installing
additional analog filters. You will notice the
differences when you fight QRM and QRN. As you
learn how to use this transceiver, you will also find
that KENWOOD is pursuing “user friendliness”. For
example, each time you change the Menu No. in
Menu mode, you will see scrolling messages on the
display that tell you what you are selecting.
Quantity
Accessory
Part Number
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically
sophisticated and some features may be new to you.
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from
the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through
the learning process now, then act as a reference in
the coming years.
Microphone
DC power cable
7-pin DIN plug
8-pin DIN plug
13-pin DIN plug
Fuse (25 A)
Fuse (4 A)
Screw Set
Spacer for MB-430
Line filter1
Retaining Band1
CD-ROM
Instruction Manual
FEATURES
Schematic/ Block
Diagrams
T91-0352-XX
E30-3157-XX
E07-0751-XX
E07-0851-XX
E07-1351-XX
F05-2531-XX
F06-4027-XX
N99-2024-XX
G11-2698-XX
L79-1408-XX
J61-0307-XX
T93-0123-XX
B62-1221-XX
B52-0614-XX
B52-0616-XX
B52-0617-XX
B52-0618-XX
B46-0469-XX
(K-type) or
B46-0310-XX
(All E-types)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All mode operation from HF to 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/
TS-B2000 Optional) amateur radio band with DSP
functions.
Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
units.
Adjustable DSP filter frequencies.
High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control (AGC).
A second independent sub-receiver for the 144 MHz
and 430 (440) MHz bands (FM and AM mode only).
A built-in Antenna Tuner for HF/ 50 MHz band.
A built-in 9600/ 1200 bps TNC for DX Packet
Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) and Sky Command II+
operations.
DX Packet Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) for DX hunting.
Instant Satellite communication key.
A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW
operation.
Warranty card
1
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TS-2000X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
–
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E and E2-type only
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
The writing conventions described below have been
followed to simplify instructions and avoid
unnecessary repetition.
Instruction
Press [KEY].
Press
[KEY1]+[KEY2].
Press
[KEY1], [KEY2].
Press
[KEY]+[
].
What to Do
Press and release KEY.
Press and hold KEY1 down,
then press KEY2. If there are
more than two keys, press and
hold down each key in turn until
the final key has been pressed.
Press KEY1 momentarily,
release KEY1, then press KEY2.
With the transceiver power OFF,
press and hold KEY, then switch
ON the transceiver power by
pressing [ ] (POWER).
i
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL
NOTICE TO THE USER
The models listed below are covered by this manual.
One or more of the following statements may be
applicable for this equipment.
TS-2000:
HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band
Transceiver
TS-2000X: HF/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz All-mode
Multi-band Transceiver
TS-B2000: HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band
Transceiver
As for TS-B2000, refer to the on-line help for
information on how to operate and control the
transceiver. Refer to pages 2, 3, and 13 for the
installation and information on the connectors.
MARKET CODES
K-type:
The Americas
E-type:
Europe
E2-type: Spain
The market code is shown on the carton box.
Refer to the specifications {page 105} for the
information on available operating frequencies.
ii
FCC WARNING
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.
Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful
interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in
the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to
operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or
modification is made.
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED
BY THE FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that the
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer for technical assistance.
PRECAUTIONS
Please observe the following precautions to prevent
fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:
• Connect the transceiver only to a power source
described in this manual or as marked on the
transceiver itself.
• Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power
cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched
by items placed near or against the cables. Pay
particular attention to locations near AC
receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to
the transceiver.
• Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the
transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into
the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to
insert any objects into the transceiver.
• Do not attempt to defeat methods used for
grounding and electrical polarization in the
transceiver, particularly involving the power input
cable.
• Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this
transceiver using approved methods. Grounding
helps protect against voltage surges caused by
lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up
of static charge.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
GROUND
CLAMP
•
•
•
•
•
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources
such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other
devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint
thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet
of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm
water or a mild detergent.
Disconnect the input power cable from the power
source when the transceiver is not used for long
periods of time.
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do
accessory installations described in this manual or
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions
carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar
with this type of work, seek assistance from an
experienced individual, or have a professional
technician do the task.
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the
following cases:
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.
b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the
transceiver.
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or
performance has seriously degraded.
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the
enclosure damaged.
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
GROUNDING
CONDUCTORS
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
•
•
•
•
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE
GROUNDING ELECTRODE
SYSTEM
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor
antenna from power lines is one and one-half
times the vertical height of the associated antenna
support structure. This distance allows adequate
clearance from the power lines if the support
structure fails for any reason.
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with
its ventilation. Do not place books or other
equipment on the transceiver that may impede the
free movement of air. Allow a minimum of
4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the
transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf.
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources
of moisture. For example, avoid use near a
bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp
basement or attic.
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is
often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the
power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact
a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for
advice.
iii
CONTENTS
THANK YOU ............................................................. i
FEATURES ............................................................... i
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ..................................... i
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED .................. i
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL ................. ii
MARKET CODES .................................................... ii
NOTICE TO USER .................................................. ii
PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... iii
CONTENTS ............................................................ iv
CHAPTER 1
INSTALLATION
ANTENNA CONNECTION ....................................... 1
GROUND CONNECTION ........................................ 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................... 1
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ...................... 2
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000 (X) ONLY) .............. 2
REPLACING FUSES ............................................... 2
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS ............................... 3
FRONT PANEL .................................................... 3
Headphones (PHONES) ................................. 3
Microphone (MIC) ........................................... 3
REAR PANEL ...................................................... 3
External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2) ......... 3
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) ................... 3
CHAPTER 2
YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50MHz band)
RECEIVING ............................................................. 4
TRANSMITTING ...................................................... 5
CHAPTER 3
YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
RECEIVING ............................................................. 6
TRANSMITTING ...................................................... 7
CHAPTER 4
GETTING ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 8
REAR PANEL ........................................................ 13
DISPLAY ............................................................... 14
MICROPHONE ...................................................... 17
CHAPTER 5
OPERATING BASICS
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF ............................. 18
ADJUSTING VOLUME .......................................... 18
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN ....................... 18
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN ...................... 18
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ............................. 18
SELECTING A BAND ............................................ 18
SELECTING A MODE ............................................ 19
ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 19
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 19
FRONT PANEL METER ......................................... 19
TRANSMITTING .................................................... 20
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER ..................... 20
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 20
CHAPTER 6
MENU SETUP
WHAT IS A MENU?................................................ 21
MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 21
MENU ACCESS .................................................... 21
iv
QUICK MENU ........................................................ 21
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU ............... 21
USING THE QUICK MENU ............................... 21
MENU CONFIGURATION ..................................... 22
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST ......................... 26
CHAPTER 7
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SSB TRANSMISSION ........................................... 28
FM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 28
AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM ......................... 29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM ......................... 29
CW TRANSMISSION ............................................ 30
AUTO ZERO-BEAT ........................................... 30
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 30
CHAPTER 8
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ........................ 31
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) .......... 31
FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 32
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET .......................... 32
Selecting an Offset Direction ......................... 32
Selecting an Offset Frequency ...................... 32
TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 33
Activating the Tone Function ......................... 33
Selecting a Tone Frequency .......................... 33
Selecting Continuous or Burst ....................... 33
Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone ........................ 33
AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET ................... 34
REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 34
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 34
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 34
FM CTCSS OPERATION ....................................... 35
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN ................................... 35
FM DCS OPERATION ............................................. 36
DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 36
CHAPTER 9
COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING ........................................................... 37
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY .................... 37
Direct Frequency Entry ................................. 37
Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 37
Quick QSY .................................................... 37
Fine Tuning ................................................... 38
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 38
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) .......... 38
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 38
TRANSMITTING .................................................... 39
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 39
Microphone Input Level ................................. 39
Delay Time ................................................... 39
SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 40
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 40
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 41
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM) ...................... 41
TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM) .......................... 41
TRANSMIT INHIBIT ........................................... 41
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE
TRANSMITTING ................................................ 41
CONTENTS
CW BREAK-IN ....................................................... 42
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR
FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 42
ELECTRONIC KEYER .......................................... 42
CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 42
AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 42
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio ....................... 42
BUG KEY FUNCTION ....................................... 43
CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 43
Storing CW Messages .................................. 43
Checking CW Messages without
Transmitting .................................................. 43
Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 43
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time .... 44
Changing the Sidetone Volume ..................... 44
Inset Keying .................................................. 44
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW ............ 44
CW REVERSE (RECEIVE) ................................ 44
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE ............................ 44
CHAPTER 10
SUB-RECEIVER
SUB-RECEIVER .................................................... 45
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND .......................... 45
TX BAND ........................................................... 45
CONTROL BAND .............................................. 45
RECEIVING ........................................................... 45
ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER .................. 45
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER ............. 45
SELECTING A BAND ........................................ 45
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF)
GAIN ................................................................. 46
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH ............................ 46
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ............................ 46
SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER ...................... 46
SELECTING A MODE FOR
THE SUB-RECEIVER........................................ 46
FM CTCSS OPERATION ................................... 46
FM DCS OPERATION ....................................... 46
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 46
DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 46
ATTENUATOR ................................................... 47
PRE-AMPLIFIER ............................................... 47
DUAL WATCH ................................................... 47
SCAN ................................................................ 47
NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 47
TRANSMITTING .................................................... 47
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER .................. 47
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 47
FM REPEATER OPERATION ............................ 47
REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 47
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 48
TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 48
MEMORY .............................................................. 48
CHAPTER 11
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
PACKET RADIO .................................................... 49
BUILT-IN TNC ........................................................ 49
PREPARATION ..................................................... 50
DCD SENSE.......................................................... 50
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY) .................... 51
AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR/PSK31 ........... 52
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE ............................... 52
DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE ............................... 53
SATELLITE OPERATION ...................................... 53
BASIC OPERATION .......................................... 53
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS .. 54
RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY
CHANNEL ......................................................... 54
SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME ........................... 54
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE ........... 54
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY ........... 54
USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE .............. 54
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND ............. 54
CHAPTER 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
DSP FILTERS ........................................................ 55
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER
BANDWIDTH ..................................................... 55
SSB/ FM/ AM Modes .................................... 55
CW/ FSK Modes ........................................... 55
NOTCH FILTER (SSB) ...................................... 56
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM) ................................. 56
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (ALL MODES) ........... 56
NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 56
Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment .............. 56
Settign the N.R. 2 Time Constant .................. 56
NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 57
PRE-AMPLIFIER ................................................... 57
ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 57
CHAPTER 13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY CHANNELS .......................................... 58
STORING DATA IN MEMORY ........................... 58
Simplex Channels ......................................... 58
Split-Frequency Channels ............................. 59
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 59
Memory Recall .............................................. 59
Memory Scroll............................................... 60
Temporary Frequency Changes .................... 60
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION .................. 60
MEMORY TRANSFER ...................................... 61
Memory ➡ VFO Transfer .............................. 61
Channel ➡ Channel Transfer ........................ 61
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES ................... 62
Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................ 62
Programmable VFO ...................................... 62
Memory Channel Lockout ............................. 62
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................... 62
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME ............................. 63
MEMORY GROUP ............................................ 64
Memory Group Select ................................... 64
QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 64
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY .................... 64
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ..... 65
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES .......... 65
QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER .............. 65
v
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 14 SCAN
NORMAL SCAN .................................................... 66
VFO SCAN ........................................................ 66
PROGRAM SCAN ............................................. 67
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED.......... 67
SCAN HOLD ..................................................... 68
MHz SCAN ........................................................ 68
MEMORY SCAN .................................................... 68
SCAN RESUME METHOD ................................ 68
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 68
GROUP SCAN .................................................. 69
CALL SCAN ....................................................... 69
VISUAL SCAN ................................................... 70
Using Visual Scan (VFO) .............................. 70
Changing the Number of Channels to Scan .. 70
Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel) ........... 70
CHAPTER 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) .......................................... 72
ANTENNAS ........................................................... 72
HF/ 50 MHz BAND ............................................. 72
VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHZ BAND ................................ 72
APO (Auto Power OFF) ......................................... 72
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ........................... 72
Presetting .......................................................... 73
ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 73
AUTO MODE ......................................................... 73
BEEP FUNCTION .................................................. 74
CALL CHANNEL .................................................... 75
DISPLAY ............................................................... 75
BRIGHTNESS ................................................... 75
CONTRAST ....................................................... 75
KEY ILLUMINATION .......................................... 75
DTMF .................................................................... 75
MANUAL DTMF DIALING .................................. 75
DTMF MEMORY ............................................... 75
Entering DTMF tones .................................... 75
Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data ... 76
DTMF Tone Time Length .............................. 76
DTMF Pause Period ..................................... 76
HF RX ANTENNA .................................................. 76
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL ............................ 76
LOCK FUNCTIONS ............................................... 77
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ...................... 77
LOCK ALL FUNCTION ...................................... 77
MICROPHONE PF KEYS ...................................... 77
MONITOR ............................................................. 77
PF KEY .................................................................. 77
RISE TIME OF CW ................................................ 77
RX DSP EQUALIZER ............................................ 78
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO
(SSB/ FM/ AM) ................................................... 78
SEPARATE SPEAKER OUTPUT ........................... 78
S-METER SQUELCH ............................................ 78
SQUELCH HANG TIME ..................................... 78
TIME-OUT TIMER ................................................. 78
vi
TNC ....................................................................... 79
TRANSVERTER .................................................... 79
TX MONITOR ........................................................ 79
TX POWER ........................................................... 79
QUICK DATA TRANSFER ..................................... 80
SETTING UP ..................................................... 80
Equipment Needed ....................................... 80
Connections ................................................. 80
USING QUICK TRANSFER ............................... 80
Transferring Data .......................................... 80
Receiving Data ............................................. 80
COMPUTER CONTROL ........................................ 81
SETTING UP ..................................................... 81
Equipment Needed ....................................... 81
Connections ................................................. 81
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ....................... 81
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER ............. 81
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (K-type ONLY) .. 82
PREPARATION ................................................. 82
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 82
SKY COMMAND II+ (K-type ONLY) ....................... 83
PREPARATION ................................................. 83
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 84
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER ................. 85
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 85
USING ANOTHER TS-2000
AS A COMMANDER .......................................... 87
USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER ............. 88
REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY) ................. 88
LOCK-BAND REPEATER .................................. 88
CROSS-BAND REPEATER ............................... 88
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION ....... 88
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL) .......................................................... 89
RECORDING MESSAGES ................................ 89
MESSAGE PLAYBACK ..................................... 89
Checking Messages ..................................... 89
Sending Messages ....................................... 90
Erasing a Recorded Message ....................... 90
Changing Inter-message Interval Time .......... 90
Changing Playback Volume .......................... 90
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) ............ 91
MICROPROCESSOR RESET ............................... 92
INITIAL SETTINGS ............................................ 92
PARTIAL RESET ............................................... 92
FULL RESET ..................................................... 92
CHAPTER 16
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER .......................................................... 93
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER .............................. 93
RTTY EQUIPMENT ............................................... 94
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER ........................................ 94
ANTENNA TUNER ................................................ 94
MCP AND TNC ...................................................... 95
TYPICAL MCP/ TNC SETUP ................................. 96
LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430
(440) MHz and 1.2 GHz) ........................................ 96
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ........................ 97
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT ................... 97
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT ........................ 97
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET .................................. 98
RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL .................................... 98
CHAPTER 18
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................... 99
SERVICE ........................................................... 99
SERVICE NOTE ................................................ 99
CLEANING ........................................................ 99
LITHIUM BATTERY ............................................... 99
DEMONSTRATION MODE .................................... 99
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................... 100
OPERATION NOTICES ....................................... 103
DC POWER SUPPLY ...................................... 103
TX SIGNAL HARMONICS ............................... 103
INTERNAL BEATS .......................................... 103
VISUAL SCAN ................................................. 103
SENSITIVITY (K-type ONLY) ........................... 103
AGC ................................................................ 103
SUB-RECEIVER .............................................. 103
CHAPTER 19
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................ 104
CHAPTER 20
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 105
CHAPTER 21
APPENDIX
TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL ................................... 109
BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST .......................... 110
COM CONNECTOR ............................................ 113
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ........................... 113
CONTROL OPERATION ................................. 113
COMPUTER CONTROL .................................. 114
Alphabetical Commands ............................. 114
Parameters ................................................. 114
Terminator .................................................. 114
Error Messages .......................................... 114
PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES ................... 115
CHAPTER 22
INDEX
INDEX ................................................................. 142
vii
INSTALLATION
Install and connect an antenna system
{page 1}.
Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.
Install a ground system that satisfies DC
and RF grounding requirements {page 1}.
Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 94}.
Accessories include the following:
Install lightning protection to protect the
antenna system, your personal safety,
and your property {page 1}.
•
•
•
•
•
Microphone
• Headphones
Antenna Tuner
• External Speaker
CW Key
• RTTY Equipment
Computer
• Linear Amplifier
TNC/ Multimode
• Remote Panel
Communications Processor
ANTENNA CONNECTION
GROUND CONNECTION
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line,
and ground. The transceiver can give excellent
results if the antenna system and its installation are
given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50Ω
antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50Ω coaxial
cable, and first-quality connectors. All connections
must be clean and tight.
At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to
prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior
communications results, a good RF ground is
required, against which the antenna system can
operate. Both of these conditions can be met by
providing a good earth ground for your station. Bury
one or more ground rods or a large copper plate
under the ground, then connect this to the transceiver
GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper
strap, cut as short as possible, for this connection.
Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a
plastic water pipe as a ground.
After making the connections, match the impedance
of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is
1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit
output to drop and may lead to radio frequency
interference to consumer products such as stereo
receivers and televisions. You may even interfere
with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is
distorted could indicate that your antenna system is
not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s power.
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed line
to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you are
using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the
secondary antenna to ANT 2. Connect VHF
(144 MHz), UHF (430/ 440 MHz), and 1.2 GHz
(TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional) antennas to their
respective antenna connectors on the rear of the
transceiver. Refer to page 13 for the location of the
antenna connectors.
◆
◆
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Even in areas where lightning storms are less
common, there are usually a limited number of
storms each year. Consider carefully how to protect
your equipment and home from lightning. The
installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there
is more that you can do. For example, terminate your
antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel
that you install outside your home. Ground this entry
panel to a good outside ground, then connect the
appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and
your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,
disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will
ensure added protection.
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other
matched load may damage the transceiver. Always
connect the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning
arrester to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and
transceiver damage.
Note: The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the SWR
is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection to
compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.
1
1 INSTALLATION
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
REPLACING FUSES
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate
13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased
separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver to
an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to
connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply.
Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.
The current capacity of the power supply must be
20.5 A peak or more.
If a fuse blows, determine the cause then correct the
problem. Only after the problem has been resolved,
replace the blown fuse with a new one with the
specified ratings. If newly installed fuses continue to
blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a
KENWOOD service station or your dealer for
assistance.
Fuse holders
(Fuse 25 A)
Black
Red
Fuse Location
Fuse Current Rating
TS-2000(X)/
TS-B2000
(For an external antenna tuner)
Supplied DC power
cable
4A
25 A
Fuse (4 A)
TS-2000/ TS-2000X
TS-B2000
DC 13.8 V
First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated
DC power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal
and the black lead to the negative terminal. Next,
connect the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC
power connector. Press the connectors firmly
together until the locking tab clicks.
Note:
◆ Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver, be
sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.
◆ Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you
make all connections.
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000(X) ONLY)
This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you
can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the
bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the
limit as shown.
Pull the bail
2
1 INSTALLATION
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS
FRONT PANEL
■ Headphones (PHONES)
Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a
4 to 32Ω impedance. This jack accepts a
6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or
3-conductor (stereo) plug. After connecting the
headphones, you will hear no sound from the
internal (or optional external) speaker.
Headphone
■ Microphone (MIC)
Connect a microphone having an impedance
between 250 and 600Ω. Fully insert the
connector, then screw the retaining ring clockwise
until secure. Compatible microphones include the
MC-43S, MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80,
MC-85, and MC-90. Do not use the MC-44,
MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM,
MC-45DME, or MC-53DM microphones.
TS-2000
TS-2000X
TS-B2000
MIC q
PTT w
DOWN e
UP r
Microphone
i GND (STBY)
u GND (MIC)
y NC
t 8 V (10 mA max)
MIC connector (Front view)
REAR PANEL
■ External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2)
This transceiver has 2 independent receivers.
Thus, it can output 2 separate audio signals. As a
default, the transceiver mixes both audio signals
internally and outputs them from the internal
speaker. On the rear panel of the transceiver,
there are 2 external speaker jacks. If an external
speaker is connected to EXP.SP1, the internal
speaker will mute. If the speaker is connected to
EXT.SP2, both the external speaker and the
internal speaker will function. Use only external
speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8Ω (8Ω
nominal). These jacks accept only 3.5 mm (1/8")
diameter, 2-conductor (mono) plugs.
External speaker
TS-2000
TS-2000X
TS-B2000
Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio output
of this jack could damage your hearing.
■ Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)
For CW operation using the internal electronic
keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE
jack. For CW operation without using the internal
electronic keyer, connect a straight key,
semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer, or the
CW keyed output from a Multimode
Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY
jack. The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a
6.3 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm
(1/8") 2-conductor plug respectively. External
electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive
keying to be compatible with this transceiver. Use
a shielded cable between the key and the
transceiver.
GND
•
•
•
•
+
Straight key
Bug key
Electronic keyer
MCP CW output
GND dash dot
• Paddle
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer, you
may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another
type of keyer unless you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW.
Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER” section {page 42} to become
familiar with the internal keyer.
3
YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)
Are you ready to give your TS-2000(X) a quick try? Reading these two pages should get your voice on the air
in your first QSO on the HF/ 50 MHz band shortly. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide.
If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t understand, read the detailed explanations given
later in this manual.
RECEIVING
2
6
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
HI/
SHIFT
9
ENT
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
SEL
d
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
25
50
40
60dB
100W
FILTER
e Confirm that VFO A has been selected for
communications; “tA” should be visible on
the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select
VFO A.
r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise
until you hear a suitable level of background
noise.
t Press [+]/ [–] to select an HF/ 50 MHz Amateur
radio band.
4
M/S
A/B
SUB
SG.SEL
1MHz
w Switch ON the DC power supply, then press
and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the
transceiver.
• Do not press the switch for more than
approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver
will be switched OFF.
• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed
by the selected frequency and other
indicators.
20
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
VFO/CH
VFO/M
q Set the following as specified:
• MAIN AF:
Fully counterclockwise
• MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
• MAIN SQL:
Fully counterclockwise
9
TFSET
MAIN
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to
briefly try the transceiver.
7
+
TL
SA
CTRL
8
5
_
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
SCAN
5
MG.SEL
M VFO
3
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
1 7
1 4
1
y Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to
select an operating mode.
•
To select the second mode on each key,
press the same key again. For example,
each press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] switches
between LSB and USB modes.
u If you have selected FM, turn the MAIN SQL
control clockwise until the background noise is
just eliminated; the MAIN band LED (above the
[MIC/ CAR] key) turns off.
• With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.
i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
• If you do not hear any stations, you may
have the wrong antenna connector selected.
Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to switch
between the antenna 1 and 2 connectors.
2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)
TRANSMITTING
4 9
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
2 3
PHONES
CLEAR
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
HI/
SHIFT
9
ENT
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
TFSET
MAIN
REV
M/S
A/B
SUB
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
SG.SEL
1MHz
w Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
• “AT ” appears.
S
1
9
20
50
25
10
PWR
ALC
7
40
60dB
CTRL
e Press and hold [AT/ ANT1/2] to activate the builtin antenna tuner.
• “AT ” starts blinking and the MAIN band LED
above the [MIC/ CAR] key turns red.
S
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
A=B
M.IN
•
7
•
With FM selected, skip this step.
t Press [SEND].
• The MAIN band LED turns red.
y Begin speaking into the microphone in your
normal tone of voice.
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
60dB
100W
FILTER
60dB
100W
FILTER
•
SUB
AF
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
SCAN
MAIN
SPLIT
TRACE
u LSB/ USB: While speaking into the microphone,
adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC
meter reflects according to your voice level.
100W
FILTER
PWR
ALC
MULTI CH
TL
SA
q Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired
station or to select an unused frequency.
5
+
M.IN
MR
1
3
_
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
5 8
9.6k STA CON
Tuning should be completed in under
20 seconds, then “AT ” stops blinking.
If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds,
error beeps sound. Press [AT/ ANT1/2] to stop
the error beeps and quit tuning. Check your
antenna system before continuing. If you do
not press [AT/ ANT1/2], tuning will continue for
approximately 60 seconds.
Note: You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the
transceiver while the antenna tuner is trying to tune the antenna.
This is simply the relay switches turning ON and OFF.
r With LSB, USB, or AM selected, press
[MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain
Adjust.
• “MIC GAIN 50” appears.
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated
power meter slightly reflects to your voice level.
FM: Skip this step.
i When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return
to receive mode.
o Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjustment.
Note: If desired, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} to try the
Microphone Gain Adjust for FM.
This completes your introduction to the
TS-2000(X), but there is a great deal more to know.
“OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the following
chapters explain all the functions of this transceiver,
starting with the most basic, commonly-used
functions.
5
YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
If your primary operating band is VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz), the TS-2000(X) can also serve you
as a powerful All-mode VHF/ UHF transceiver. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide to
get you up on the air on the VHF/ UHF band. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t
understand, read the detailed explanations given later in this manual.
RECEIVING
2
6
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
HI/
SHIFT
9
ENT
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
SEL
5
7
9
20
50
25
10
40
60dB
100W
FILTER
e Press [MAIN], then confirm that VFO A has
been selected for communications; “t
A”
should be visible on the display. If it has not,
press [A/B] to select VFO A.
r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise
until you hear a suitable level of background
noise.
t Press [+]/ [–] to move up to the VHF
(144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz) Amateur
radio band.
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
FILTER
6
40
100W
60dB
M/S
A/B
SUB
SG.SEL
1MHz
w Switch ON the DC power supply, then press
and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the
transceiver.
• Do not press the switch for more than
approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver
will be switched OFF.
• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed
by the selected frequency and other
indicators.
3
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
VFO/CH
VFO/M
q Set the following as specified:
• MAIN AF:
Fully counterclockwise
• MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
• MAIN SQL:
Fully counterclockwise
1
TFSET
MAIN
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to
briefly try the transceiver.
S
+
TL
SA
CTRL
8
PWR
ALC
_
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
5
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
3
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
1 7
1 4
1
y Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is
not, press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM.
u Turn the SQL control clockwise until the
background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN
band LED turns off.
i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
• You can use the MULTI/ CH control to
change the frequency faster. If you do not
hear any stations, the antenna may not be
installed or connected properly. Check
the antenna connector on the rear panel
{page 13}.
3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
TRANSMITTING
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
.
A.N
.
MANUAL
.
B.C
LO/
WIDTH
1
_
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
.
8
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
0
9
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
+
TFSET
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
SUB
M/S
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
SG.SEL
1MHz
DISP
3 5
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
C.IN
CALL
R
N.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
1
CTRL
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
2
q Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not,
press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to change the operating
mode to FM.
w Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control
to tune in a desired station or to select an unused
frequency.
e Press [SEND].
• The MAIN band LED turns red.
r Begin speaking into the microphone in your
normal tone of voice.
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
60dB
100W
FILTER
t When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return
to receive mode.
This completes your introduction on how to receive
and transmit using the TS-2000(X) on a VHF/ UHF
band. Refer to “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and
the following chapters for explanations on all the
functions of this transceiver.
7
GETTING ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL
2
1
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
4
6
7
8
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
PHONES
CLEAR
MAIN
LEVEL
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
.
B.C
10
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
.
8
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
0
HI/
SHIFT
9
ENT
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
_
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
MENU
TFSET
C.IN
CALL
R.
MIC
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
LEVEL
9
RIT/SUB
+
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
3
5
9.6k STA CON
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
M/S
A/B
SUB
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
1MHz
SG.SEL
CTRL
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
11 13
12
q PF key
i AT/ ANT1/2 key
You can assign a function to this Programmable
Function key. The default function is Voice 1
{page 77}.
Press to activate the internal antenna tuner {page 72}
or an external antenna tuner. Press [FUNC],
[AT/ ANT1/2] to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2
for the HF/ 50 MHz band {page 72}.
w [
] (POWER) switch
Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power
ON. Press again to switch the power OFF.
e ATT/ F LOCK key
Press to switch the receiver attenuator ON or OFF
{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch
the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF {page 77}.
r PRE/ LOCK A key
Press to switch the receiver pre-amplifier ON or OFF
{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to lock all
the transceiver keys {page 77}.
t VOX/ LEVEL key
In voice mode, press to switch the Voice-Operated
Transmit function ON or OFF {page 39}. In CW
mode, press to switch the Break-in function ON or
OFF {page 42}. Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL] to
adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation.
The VOX LED lights orange when the VOX function is
active.
y PROC/ LEVEL key
Press to switch the Speech Processor for transmitting
ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],
[PROC/ LEVEL] to adjust the Speech Processor
input level. The PROC LED lights orange when the
Speech Processor function is actived.
u SEND key
Press to switch the transceiver between receive
mode and transmit mode {pages 5, 7}.
8
o PHONES jack
Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a
plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from
the speaker {pages 3, 78}.
!0 MIC connector
Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,
then securely screw down the connector locking ring
{page 3}.
!1 N.R./ LEVEL key
Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction function
ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL] to adjust
the Noise Reduction level. Press [FUNC],
[N.R./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment
{page 56}.
!2 A.N./ LEVEL key
Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function ON or
OFF. Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to adjust the
DSP Auto Notch reduction level. Press [FUNC],
[A.N./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment
{page 56}.
!3 B.C./ MANUAL key
Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Cancel function
ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] to
adjust the beat cancel frequency manually. Press
[FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] again to finish the manual
adjustment {page 56}.
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
16
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
_
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
9
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
+
TFSET
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
M/S
A/B
SUB
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
DISP
14
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
SG.SEL
1MHz
CTRL
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
18
15
17
!4 Multi-purpose keypad
•
Consists of 10 keys that are used to enter numeric
data. Also used for the following functions:
•
•
5/ METER key
Press to select the meter scales {page 19}.
•
6/ CTCSS/SEL key
Press to activate the Continuous Tone Coded
Squelch System (CTCSS) function for FM mode.
To select the CTCSS tone frequency, press
[FUNC], [5/ CTCSS/SEL], then select your
desired CTCSS tone frequency using the
MULTI/ CH control {page 35}.
•
7/ NB/LEVEL key
Press to switch the Noise Blanker ON or OFF.
Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/LEVEL] to adjust the Noise
Blanker level {page 57}.
•
8/ AGC/OFF key
Press to adjust the response time of the Automatic
Gain Control. To switch the AGC OFF, press
[FUNC], [8/ AGC/OFF] {page 38}.
•
•
9/ FINE/STEP key
Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow
more precise tuning {page 38}.
0/ SHIFT/OFFSET key
Press to switch the Shift function for FM mode ON
or OFF when accessing the repeaters. The Shift
frequency can be manually adjusted by pressing
[FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET], then adjusting the
shift frequency value using the MULTI/ CH control
{page 32}.
4/ TONE/SEL key
Press to activate the sub-audible Tone function to
access repeaters for FM mode. To select the Tone
frequency, press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL], then
select your desired tone frequency using the
MULTI/ CH control {page 33}.
•
Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch
function for FM mode. To select the DCS code,
press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL], then select your
desired code using the MULTI/ CH control
{page 36}.
1/ CH1/REC, 2/ CH2/REC, and 3/ CH3/REC keys
Press to play back or record the CW or voice
messages that are associated with the DRU-3A
Digital Recording Unit {page 89} and the internal
electronic keyer {page 43}.
•/ DCS/SEL key
•
ENT key
Press to enter your desired frequency using the
keypad {page 37}.
!5 FUNC key
Press to access the secondary functions that are
assigned to the keys. While FUNC is active, the
FUNC LED lights orange.
!6 MIC/ CAR key
Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 20}.
While the Speech Processor function is ON, it
becomes the Speech Processor output level
adjustment key {page 40}.
Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to adjust the carrier level
for CW, FSK and AM mode {page 20}.
!7 PWR/ TX MONI key
Press to adjust the output power {page 20}. Press
[FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor your
transmission signal {page 79}.
!8 KEY/ DELAY key
Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed.
Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to adjust the VOX
delay time or break-in time (Full break-in/ Semi
break-in time) for CW mode {page 42}.
9
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
19
29
20
25
28
27
33
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
_
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
.
8
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
0
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
DISP
21
23
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
TFSET
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
RIT/SUB
+
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
M/S
A/B
SUB
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
SG.SEL
1MHz
CTRL
24
26
22
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
32
30
31
!9 LSB/ USB/ AUTO key
@7 MENU key
Press to select lower sideband (LSB) or upper
sideband (USB) mode for voice or digital operation.
Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the auto
mode selection {page 73}.
Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used
for activating and configuring functions {page 21}.
@0 CW/ FSK/ REV key
While operating split-frequency, press to monitor or
change your transmit frequency {page 31}.
Press to select CW or FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)
mode {pages 30, 51}. Press [FUNC],
[CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse the sideband pitch.
@9 +/ – (Up/ Down) keys
@1 FM/ AM/ NAR key
Press to select FM or AM mode {pages 28, 29}.
Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select narrow
bandwidth transmission mode {page 29}.
@2 CLR key
Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.
Also used to erase memory channels {page 62} or
locking out memory channels from the scan list
{page 62}.
@3 DISP key
Press to toggle the normal operating mode and DSP
filter setting display mode {page 55}. Press and hold
to start the Visual Scan function {page 70}.
@4 1MHz/ SEL key
Press to switch the MHz Up/ Down function ON or
OFF using the MULTI/ CH control. Press [FUNC],
[1MHz/ SEL] to change the increment/ decrement
step value {page 37}. Press and hold to start the
MHz Scan function {page 68}.
@5 Tuning control
Turn to select the desired frequency {page 37}. Use
the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.
The lever behind this control adjusts the control
torque level; turn fully clockwise for light torque or
fully counterclockwise for heavy torque.
@6 CTRL key
Press to toggle the operating controls between the
main transceiver and the sub-receiver. The
transmission band is not affected by this key.
10
@8 TF-SET key
Press to step through all the Amateur radio bands
consecutively {page 18}. Also used to make
selections from the Menu {page 21}, and to check the
Start and End frequencies of the Scan function
{page 62}.
#0 MAIN key
Press to transfer the operating controls to the MAIN
transceiver. Also moves the transmission band to the
main transceiver frequency.
#1 SUB key
Press to transfer the operating controls to the subreceiver. Also moves the transmission band to the
sub-receiver frequency.
#2 SCAN/ SG.SEL key
Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 66}.
Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to select a scan
group {page 69}.
#3 CALL/ C.IN key
Press to recall a call channel for the selected operating
band (HF/ 50 MHz/ 144 MHz/ 430 (440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz
(TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional)). Press [FUNC],
[CALL/ C.IN] to write a new Call Channel to the
memory {page 75}.
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
41
36 35
34
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CLEAR
SUB
MAIN
LEVEL
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
HI/
SHIFT
9
ENT
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
TFSET
C.IN
CALL
R.
N.
LEVEL
MIC
43
+
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
39
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
40
42
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
REV
M/S
A/B
SUB
SPLIT
TRACE
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
SG.SEL
1MHz
CTRL
SCAN
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
M.IN
37
38
#4 QUICK MEMO keys
#7 Ms
sVFO/ MG.SEL key
Controls the Quick Memory function {page 64}.
Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a
sVFO/ MG.SEL]
VFO {page 61}. Press [FUNC], [Ms
to enter Memory Group Select mode {page 64}.
•
•
MR key
Press to recall data from the Quick Memory
{page 65}.
#8 M.IN key
M.IN key
Writes data into a memory channel {page 58} or
selects Memory Scroll mode {page 60}.
Press to write data into the Quick Memory
{page 64}.
#9 RIT/ CW TUNE key
Press to activate Satellite communication mode
{page 53}.
Press to switch the Receive Incremental Tuning
function ON or OFF {page 38}. Press [FUNC],
[RIT/ CW TUNE] to activate the automatic zero-beat
function for CW mode {page 30}.
#6 Frequency control keys
$0 XIT/ ALT key
These keys control functions related to selecting a
frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.
Press to switch the Transmit Incremental Tuning
function ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],
[XIT/ ALT] to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode for
the 1.2 GHz band (FM) ON or OFF {page 72}.
#5 SATL key
•
•
•
•
A/B / M/S key
Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 18}.
In Satellite mode, press to swap the MAIN and
SUB frequencies so that you can change the
frequencies with a Tuning control {page 54}.
$1 CLEAR key
SPLIT/ REV key
$2 SET/ P.C.T. key
Press to use split-frequency operation which
allows you to use different transmit and receive
frequencies {page 31}. In Satellite mode, press to
toggle the Trace Reverse function ON and OFF
{page 54}.
Press to set received DX Packet Cluster frequency
data to the main transceiver when the Packet Cluster
Tune mode is activated. Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.]
to switch the Packet Cluster Tune mode ON or OFF
{page 53}.
VFO/M / VFO/CH key
$3 TNC Status Indicators
Press to select either Memory or VFO mode
{page 59}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the
VFO and memory channel operations {page 54}.
•
Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero
{pages 38, 40}.
Lights when the internal TNC is operating at
9600 bps. The default operating mode is
1200 bps {page 50}.
A=B/ TRACE key
Press to copy the data in the currently selected
VFO to the other VFO {page 31}. In Satellite
mode, press to toggle the TRACE function ON and
OFF {page 54}.
9.6k LED
•
STA LED
Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in the
buffer to transmit.
•
CON LED
Lights when the internal TNC is connected to
another TNC.
11
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
54
55
45
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
CLEAR
MAIN
LEVEL
SUB
CH1/REC CH2/
REC CH3/REC
N.
A.N
.
MANUAL
.
B.C
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METE
R CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC
/OFF FINE/STE
P
7
.
8
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
ET
0
9
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
AUTO
LSB
USB
47
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
DISP
52
MENU
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
TFSET
C.IN
CALL
R.
LEVEL
MIC
44
+
P.C.T
SET
FU N C
PHONES
46
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
TL
SA
MAIN
SUB
M/S
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
1MHz
SG.SEL
CTRL
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
53
48
49
50
51
$4 RIT/SUB control
%1 SUB AF control
After switching the RIT or XIT function ON, turn this
control to select the desired frequency offset
{pages 38, 40}.
Press to switch the sub-receiver ON or OFF. When it
is ON, the SUB-receiver LED lights orange.
Turn to adjust the sub-receiver frequency when the
RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the subreceiver is switched ON {page 45}.
%2 LO/ WIDTH control
$5 MANUAL BC control
Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency while the
DSP beat cancel function is set to the manual
frequency adjustment mode {page 56}.
$6 MAIN RF GAIN control
Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain for the main
transceiver {page 18}.
$7 MULTI/ CH control
In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency
up or down {page 37}. In memory channel mode,
rotate to select a memory channel {page 58}. Also
used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the
Menu mode {page 21} and as a selector to choose
settings for various functions activated by front panel
buttons. The MULTI/ CH LED lights when the
setting(s) can be changed using the MULTI/ CH
control.
$8 MAIN SQL control
Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, the head
phones and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN
connector) when no receive signal is present on the
main transceiver {page 19}.
$9 MAIN AF control
Turn to adjust the volume on the main transceiver
{page 19}.
%0 SUB SQL control
Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, head
phone and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN
connector) when no receive signal is present on the
sub-receiver {page 46}.
12
Turn to adjust the volume for the sub-receiver.
Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the value for the low cut-off DSP filter
frequency or the filter bandwidth (CW/ FSK). The
selected value appears on the main dot-matrix
display {page 55}.
%3 HI/ SHIFT control
Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the value for the high cut-off DSP filter
frequency or the Shift frequency. The selected value
appears on the sub dot-matrix display {page 55}.
%4 MAIN band LED
Lights green while the main transceiver’s squelch is
open. Lights red while transmitting on the main
transceiver’s VFO band.
%5 SUB band LED
Lights green while the sub-receiver’s squelch is open.
Lights red while transmitting on the sub-receiver’s
VFO band.
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
REAR PANEL
1
2
ANT 2
2
3
9
6
5
8
AT
ANT
144
1
ANT 1.2G
ANT 1
KEY PADDLE
GND
COM
4
PANEL
EXT. SP2 EXT. SP1
8Ω
8Ω
10
ANT
430
EXT. CONT
ACC2
12
13
11
DC
13.8V
REMOTE
14
HF
RX ANT
15
7
q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors
o COM connector
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1. If
you are using 2 antennas for the HF/ 50 MHz band,
connect the secondary antenna to the ANT 2 connector.
Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for
connecting a computer via one of its serial
communication ports {page 93}. Also used with the
Quick Data Transfer function {page 93}.
w GND post
Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between
the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 1}.
e KEY and PADDLE jacks
The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the
internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a
3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an
external key for CW operation. Read “Keys for CW
(PANEL and KEY)” {page 3} before using these jacks.
r AT connector
Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with
the external antenna tuner. Refer to the instruction
manual supplied with the tuner for more information.
t ANT 144
Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this connector.
y ANT 430
Connect your 430/ 440 MHz band antenna to this
connector.
u ANT 1.2G (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional)
Connect your 1.2 GHz band antenna to this connector.
i DC 13.8V power input connector
Connect a 13.8 V DC power source to this connector
{page 2}. Use the cable supplied with the regulated
DC power supply.
!0 PANEL connector
Connect a cable from the optional separate remote
panel (RC-2000) to this connector.
!1 EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 jacks
Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plugs
for connecting external speakers {pages 3, 78}.
!2 EXT.CONT connector
Connect your 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz or
1.2 GHz linear amplifier control cable to this
connector {page 76}.
!3 ACC2 connector
Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for
connecting various accessory equipment, such as an
external TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal {page 94}.
!4 REMOTE connector
Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting
an HF linear amplifier {page 76}. Do not connect
50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2 GHz linear
amplifier controls to this connector; use the
EXT.CONT connector instead.
!5 HF RX ANT connector
Connect a separate receive-only antenna for HF low
bands to this jack (RCA connector) {page 76}.
13
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
DISPLAY
1
S
6
1
5
3
10
PWR
ALC
7
9
20
50
25
40
8 12 14 16
7 11 13 15
60dB
100W%
FILTER
2
3
4
5
10 9
q METER
o
While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure
and display the received signal strength. It also
displays the filter width. While transmitting, serves as
a power meter plus an ALC meter, an SWR meter, or
a Speech Processor compression meter. The Peak
Hold function holds each reading for approximately
half a second.
Shows the memory channel number for the main
transceiver. If you select a channel over 99, a
leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number
ranges from 00 to 299). It also shows the Quick
Memory number location (the Quick Memory number
ranges from “0_” to “9_”).
Note: SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands.
Appears when Auto mode selection is activated
{page 73}.
w
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or
an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz
band reception.
e AT
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or
an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz
band transmission.
!0 AUTO
!1
Appears when the main transceiver is selected for the
transmission band.
!2
Appears when the main transceiver’s functions can
be controlled using the front panel keys.
r
!3 ATT
Appears while HF RX ANT {page 76} connector is
enabled to receive HF band signals. You cannot
transmit the signals though this connector.
Appears when the main transceiver’s receiver
attenuator (approx. 12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
t
Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the
main transceiver {page 49}.
Either “
” or “
” appears, depending on
whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2
connector is selected for the HF/ 50 MHz band
{page 72}.
y MHz
Appears when the MHz Up/ Down mode using the
MULTI/ CH control is switched ON {page 37}.
u ALT
Appears when ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) is activated for
the 1.2 GHz (FM) band {page 72}.
i
Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is
being used {page 59}.
14
!4 TNC
!5 PRE
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the main
transceiver is ON {page 57}.
!6 + =
“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is
selected for the main transceiver. “=” appears when
the –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz)
offset is selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
18 20 22 24
17 19 21 23 26
S
1
PWR
ALC
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
30
25 27
28
29
60dB
100W%
FILTER
31 33
34
32
!7 DCS
@6
Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the
main transceiver is ON {page 36}.
“
” appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON.
“
” appears when the RX Equalizer function of
the main transceiver is ON {pages 41, 78}.
!8 [R]
“R” appears when the Reverse function of the main
transceiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC
(Automatic Simplex Check) of the main transceiver is
activated {page 34}.
!9 C T
“T” appears when the Tone function of the main
transceiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of
the main transceiver is ON {page 35}.
@7
Appears when the Quick Menu function of the
transceiver is ON {page 21}. It also appears when
the frequency point of Program Scan Partially Slowed
is selected on the main-transceiver {page 67}.
@8
“
” appears when the Trace function is ON while
in Satellite mode. “
” appears when the
Reverse Trace function is ON {page 53}.
@0 AGC
@9 P.C.T.
Appears when the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of
the main transceiver is ON {page 38}. Disappears
when the AGC is OFF.
Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON
{page 53}.
@1 M.B.C.
“B.C.” appears when the automatic Beat Canceller is
ON. “M.B.C.” appears when the single Beat Cancel
frequency is manually controlled {page 56}.
#0 SPLIT
Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the
receive frequency {page 31}.
#1 tA s
Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON {page 57}.
“tA” or “As” appears while VFO A is selected
{page 18}. “A” appears while Menu A is being
accessed {page 21}.
@3 FINE
#2 tB s
Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning
control is ON {page 38}.
“tB” or “Bs” appears while VFO B is selected
{page 18}. “B” appears while Menu B is being
accessed {page 21}.
@2 NB
@4 A.NOTCH
Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of the
main transceiver is ON {page 56}.
@5
“
” or “
” appears, depending on whether
DSP Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced method) or
Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC method) of the main
transceiver is selected {page 56}.
#3 tM s
“tM” or “Ms” appears while a simplex memory
channel is selected {page 59}. “tMs” appears
while a split frequency memory channel is selected
{page 60}.
#4
“
” appears when the Frequency Lock function is
ON. “
” appears when the Lock All key function
is ON {page 77}.
15
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
37
36
35
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
39
38
41
44
47 50 52
46 51
40
43
42
45 49 48
54
53
60dB
100W%
FILTER
57
55
58
56
#5
$5 RIT
Appears while in Satellite mode {page 53}.
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the
main transceiver is ON {page 38}.
#6
Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is
being used for the sub-receiver {page 59}.
#7
Shows the memory channel number for the subreceiver. If you select a channel over 99, a leading
digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges
from 00 to 299).
#8
Appears when the sub-receiver is selected for the
transmission band.
#9
Appears when the sub-receiver’s functions can be
controlled using the front panel keys.
$0 ATT
Appears when the sub-receiver’s receive attenuator
(approx. 12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
$1 TNC
Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the
sub-receiver.
$2 XIT
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the
main transceiver is ON {page 40}.
$3 PRE
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the subreceiver is ON {page 57}.
$4 + =
“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is
selected for the sub-receiver. “=” appears when the
–7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is
selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.
16
$6 DCS
Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the
sub-receiver is ON {page 36}.
$7 [R]
“R” appears when the Reverse function of the subreceiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC
(Automatic Simplex Check) of the sub-receiver is
activated {page 34}.
$8 S
Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the
signal strength level {page 46}.
$9 PWR
Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the
output power level {page 20}.
%0
Serves as an S-meter to measure and display the
received signal strength for the sub-receiver. It also
displays the relative output power when the sub-band
is selected for the transmission.
%1 C T
“T” appears when the Tone function of the subreceiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of
the sub-receiver is ON {page 35}.
%2
Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the subreceiver is activated {page 56}.
%3 PKT
Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet
mode {page 49}.
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
%4 PC
MICROPHONE
Appears when the TS-2000(X) is being controlled by
a PC {page 81}.
q
%5
DWN
UP
The main transceiver operating frequency display.
w
%6
When the sub-receiver is switched ON, it shows the
receive frequency for the sub-receiver. However, if
you are controlling the main transceiver functions,
such as RIT, XIT, or SPLIT, it is used to display the
frequency information for these functions {page 45}.
PTT
%7 MAIN dot-matrix display
In the normal operating mode, it displays the
operating mode for the main transceiver. It is also
used to display various control information, such as
menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter
configuration.
%8 SUB dot-matrix display
In the normal operating mode, it displays the
operating mode for the sub-receiver. It is also used
to display various control information, such as menu
information and the DSP filter frequency
configuration.
q UP/ DWN keys
Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, memory
channels, or Menu selections up and down. Press
and hold these keys to continuously change the
settings.
w PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch
The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this
non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the
switch returns the transceiver to receive mode.
17
OPERATING BASICS
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN
1 Switch the DC power supply ON.
Set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise. You
may turn it counterclockwise slightly when you have
trouble hearing the desired signal because of
excessive atmospheric noise or interference from
other stations. First take note of the peak S-meter
reading of the desired signal. Then turn the MAIN RF
GAIN control counterclockwise until the S-meter
reads the peak value that you noted. Signals that are
weaker than this level will be attenuated and
reception of the station will become easier.
2 Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to switch
the transceiver ON.
• Do not press the switch for more than
approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will
be switched OFF.
• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by
the selected frequency and other indicators.
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
PF
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
PHONES
LEVEL
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R
.
.
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ET
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
TX MONI
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
SUB
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
MIC
CLR
UTO
SB
SB
TFSET
RIT/SUB
+
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
SATL
M
SEL
3 To switch the transceiver OFF, press [
(POWER) again.
]
4 Switch the DC power supply OFF.
• You may skip step 3. After switching the
transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON
using only the power switch of the DC power
supply. The transceiver stores the information
of the POWER switch position when the DC
power source is switched OFF.
ADJUSTING VOLUME
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise to increase the
audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the
level.
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
CLEAR
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
SUB
AF
A=B
VFO/M
CTRL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
TRACE
VFO/CH
1MHz
MAIN
SPLIT
A/B
SUB
SEL
AF
REV
M/S
MAIN
DISP
MAIN
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
MENU
C.IN
A.N
MANUAL
1
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
9.6k STA CON
_
P.C.T
SET
MAIN
LEVEL
MIC
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CALL
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
MAIN
C
MANUAL B RF GAIN
CLEAR
FUNC
PF
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
SQL
MG.SEL
M.IN
M VFO
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and
the condition of the band, you may also prefer leaving
the MAIN RF GAIN control turned counterclockwise
by the same amount rather than turning it fully
clockwise. When using FM mode, always set the
MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise.
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B
2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on
the main transceiver. Each VFO, VFO A and VFO B,
works independently so that a different frequency and
mode can be selected. When SPLIT operation is
activated, VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is
used for transmission. The opposite combination is
also possible.
Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to indicate which VFO is
selected.
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
+
P.C.T
SET
SUB
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
TFSET
C.IN
MENU
CALL
UTO
SB
SB
MULTI CH
SATL
SQL
MAIN
SUB
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
SUB
AF
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
MAIN
M/S
M.IN
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
Note:
◆ The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect the volume
of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW transmit sidetone.
The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the
MAIN AF control setting.
◆ When the optional RC-2000 is installed, you can control the
volume with the AF controls on both the transceiver and the
RC-2000. However, when turning the transceiver on, the volume
settings of the RC-2000 have priority.
TRACE
A=B
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
+
P.C.T
SET
SUB
UTO
SB
SB
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
MENU
TFSET
C.IN
1MHz
TRACE
A=B
REV
SPLIT
CALL
SEL
REV
SPLIT
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
L
SAT
M.IN
MR
M/S
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
SATL
REV
M/S
MAIN
TRACE
1MHz
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
SUB
AF
A=B
VFO/M
SEL
MAIN
SPLIT
A/B
VFO/CH
SUB
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
M.IN
SELECTING A BAND
Press [+]/ [–] to select your desired band.
• Holding down either key changes the bands
continuously.
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
+
P.C.T
SET
SUB
MENU
TFSET
C.IN
SUB
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
CALL
MAIN
UTO
SB
SB
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
SATL
M/S
MAIN
SUB
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
1MHz
18
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
MG.SEL
M VFO
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
M.IN
5 OPERATING BASICS
SELECTING A MODE
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], [CW/ FSK/ REV], or
[FM/ AM/ NAR]. To select the second mode on each
key, press the same key again. For example, each
press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] toggles between LSB
and USB mode.
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP]
to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control
counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the
frequency.
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
AUTO
LSB
USB
CLEAR
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
PF
SUB
3
A.N
5
6
.
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
7
B.C
8
.
.
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
CLR
M
SEL
1MHz
CTRL
1MHz
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
4
C.IN
CALL
SUB
7
.
DCS/SEL SHIFT/O
FFSET
A/B
VFO/M
PHONES
0
MAIN
LEVEL
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
LEVEL
MIC
9
MANUAL
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
9
ET
HI/
SHIFT
ENT
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
CLR
DISP
M
SEL
1MHz
CTRL
ENT
This transceiver provides many other methods for
quickly selecting a frequency. For further information,
see “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.
FRONT PANEL METER
The multi-function meter measures the parameters in
the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales
appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode,
and the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit
mode. Each press of [5/ METER] switches among
the ALC, SWR, and COMP meters. Peak readings
for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR
functions are held momentarily.
Meter
S
What Is Measured?
Strength of received signals
PWR
Transmit output power
ALC
Automatic level control status
SWR
Antenna system standing wave ratio
+
MULTI CH
COMP
Speech compression level when using
the Speech Processor {page 40}
FILTER
DSP filter width
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
SEND
6
8
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
M.IN
MR
VFO/CH
SG.SEL
SCAN
5
NB/LEVEL AGC/O
FF FINE/STEP
SATL
MAIN
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
VOX
.
SUB
CTRL
SUB
AF
SQL
PF
3
B.C
RIT/SUB
2
.
9.6k STA CON
_
1
TONE/SEL ME
TER CTCSS/SEL
A.N
CLEAR
P.C.T
SET
1MHz
MAIN
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
CH1/REC CH2/R
EC CH3/REC
.
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
AF
SEL
REV
SPLIT
MG.SEL
M VFO
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using
the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far
from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press
the numeric keys as necessary. For details, see
“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 37}.
N.R
Turn the MAIN SQL control, when there are no
signals present, to select the squelch level at which
the background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN
band LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer
leaving the MAIN SQL control fully counterclockwise
unless operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM.
The squelch level for the main transceiver is preset
at the factory to approximately 9 o’clock for FM and
11 o’clock for SSB and AM.
SQL
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
CTRL
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker
when no signals are present. With the squelch level
correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually
receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch
level, the stronger the signals must be to receive.
The appropriate squelch level depends on the
ambient RF noise conditions.
M/S
1MHz
SEL
ADJUSTING SQUELCH
TFSET
MR
A/B
SUB
VFO/M
SEL
Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the
Auto Mode selection. When it is active, “AUTO”
appears. If you change the frequency above or
below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver automatically
switches modes; LSB for frequencies under 9.5 MHz
and USB for frequencies equal to or above 9.5 MHz
(HF/ 50 MHz band). As for the 144 MHz,
430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands, the transceiver
automatically changes the operating mode to FM.
You can further add the frequency table data to
change the mode automatically
{page 73}.
MENU
MAIN
VFO/CH
DISP
UTO
SB
SB
TFSET
M/S
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
TX MONI
ET
0
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
MIC
FUNC
2
4
FUNC
1
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
C.IN
.
MANUAL
LO/
WIDTH
MAIN
+
MULTI CH
M.IN
SATL
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R
MIC
MENU
MAIN
LEVEL
LEVEL
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
UTO
SB
SB
CALL
PHONES
RIT/SUB
P.C.T
SET
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
9.6k STA CON
_
M.IN
Note:
◆ The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is
ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.
◆ The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a
percentage on the 1.2 GHz band.
◆ The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 and ANT 2 (HF/ 50 MHz
band).
◆ Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
19
5 OPERATING BASICS
TRANSMITTING
3 Press [PWR/ TX MONI] to complete the setting.
For voice communications, press [SEND] or press
and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone
in your normal tone of voice. When you finish
speaking, press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
Note: You may access Menu No. 23, “FINE TRANSMIT POWER
TUNING”, and select “ON” (press [+]) to change the step size from
5 W to 1 W {page 79}.
To transmit CW, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the
Break-in function ON, then close the key or keyer
paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {pages 3, 39},
then select CW mode.
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
VOX
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
SEND
PHONES
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R
.
A.N
.
MIC
1 Press [MIC/ CAR].
• The current microphone gain level appears.
The default is 50; the range is from 0 to 100.
MAIN
LEVEL
LEVEL
MANUAL
B.C
.
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
MIC
8
.
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ET
0
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
TX MONI
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
7
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
FUNC
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB
or AM mode is used without speech processing
{pages 28, 29}.
M
CAR
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
CLR
PF
SEL
1MHz
DISP
MIC
CTRL
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
VOX
TX MONI
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
SEND
PHONES
MAIN
LEVEL
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R
.
LEVEL
A.N
PWR
.
MIC
MANUAL
B.C
.
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, see
“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 28.
DELAY
KEY
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
FUNC
PF
PF
MICROPHONE GAIN
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
MIC
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ET
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
TX MONI
CLR
M
SEL
1MHz
DISP
CTRL
Note: When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you may adjust the
carrier level. In general, adjust the level so that the ALC meter reads
within the limits of the ALC zone. For the adjustment procedures,
refer to the instructions for each mode in “TRANSMISSION”
{pages 28, 29, 30}.
2 Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT].
• The MAIN band LED lights red.
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter
reflects your voice level, but does not exceed the
ALC limit.
It is wise to select a lower transmit power if
communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of
interfering with others on the band. When operating
from battery power, selecting a lower transmit power
allows you more operating time before a charge is
necessary. This transceiver allows you to change the
transmit power even while transmitting.
1 Press [PWR/ TX MONI].
• The current transmit power appears.
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated
power meter slightly reflects your voice level.
CW, FSK: While transmitting, adjust the
MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects
the carrier level within the ALC zone.
MULTI CH
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
+
P.C.T
SET
CAR
SUB
TFSET
F LOCK A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
PHONES
SATL
MAIN
MAIN
LEVEL
.
A.N
.
MANUAL
B.C
.
DELAY
KEY
LO/
WIDTH
1
2
3
TONE/SEL METER
CTCSS/SEL
4
5
6
MIC
7
8
.
0
DCS/SEL SHIFT/OFFS
PWR
9
DELAY
KEY
ET
ENT
HI/
SHIFT
CLR
1MHz
MEN
REV
CW
FSK
NAR
FM
AM
TX MONI
NB/LEVEL AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
SEL
AUTO
LSB
USB
CAR
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
MAIN
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
M.IN
M
SEL
1MHz
DISP
CTRL
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the
power.
MULTI CH
A/B
VFO/M
CH1/REC CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R
MIC
SUB
VFO/CH
LEVEL
PWR
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
M/S
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
FUNC
TX MONI
C.IN
PF
MIC
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
MENU
CALL
UTO
SB
SB
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MO
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
+
4 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT].
• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL control setting.
5 Press [MIC/ CAR].
For FM mode, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} and
select “LOW”, “MID”, or “HIGH” for the microphone
gain.
P.C.T
SET
SUB
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
QUICK MEMO
TFSET
C.IN
MENU
CALL
UTO
SB
SB
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
SATL
M/S
MAIN
SUB
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
1MHz
•
20
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
MAIN
M.IN
The selectable range differs, depending on the
current band and mode.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,
select “HIGH” for the microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity is
low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For other
microphones, select either “LOW” or “MID”.
MENU SETUP
WHAT IS A MENU?
QUICK MENU
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or
configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather
than through the physical controls of the transceiver.
Once familiar with the Menu system, you will
appreciate the versatility it offers. You can customize
the various timings, settings, and programming
functions on this transceiver to meet your needs
without using many controls and switches.
Because the number of functions this transceiver
provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items in
each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos.
to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to
create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You
can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently
use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the
Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.
MENU A/ MENU B
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU
This transceiver has two menus: Menu A and
Menu B. These menus contain identical functions
and can be configured independently. The
transceiver, therefore, allows you to switch between
two different environments quickly and easily. For
example, you can configure Menu A for DXing and
contesting while Menu B is for the relaxed local
ragchewing. By switching from Menu A to Menu B,
you can instantly change the Menu configuration and
key assignment to suit your current operating style.
Or, two operators may share a single transceiver by
dedicating one Menu to each operator. Both
operators can always enjoy their own configuration.
1 Press [MENU].
MENU ACCESS
1 Press [MENU].
• The Menu No. and setting appear on the main
dot-matrix display, and the explanation of the
menu appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Menu No.
3 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• A star appears, indicating that the Menu item
has been added to the Quick Menu.
•
To remove the item from the Quick Menu,
press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] again.
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: You cannot add a sub menu No. to the Quick Menu. Press
[MAIN] to go back to the main menu No., then press
QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to add the menu No. to the Quick Menu.
USING THE QUICK MENU
1 Press [MENU].
2 Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.
• “A” or “B” appears, indicating which Menu is
selected.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Menu No.
• Each time you change the Menu No.,
a different scrolling message appears on the
sub dot-matrix display, describing the Menu
No.
• You will see “PUSH SUB” if there are submenus in the Menu No. Pressing [SUB] allows
you to select from among the sub-menus.
Press [MAIN] to exit the sub-menu selection.
4 Press [+], [–], Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to select a
parameter.
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
2 Press [1MHz/ SEL].
• “MHz” appears.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Quick Menu No.
4 Press [+], [–], Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to change the
current setting for the selected Menu No.
5 Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.
Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning the
MULTI/ CH control in step 2 causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse
code.
21
6 MENU SETUP
MENU CONFIGURATION
Group
Operator
Interface
Tuning
Control
Memory
Channel
Scan
Operation
Menu
No.
Function
Selections
Default
Ref.
Page
OFF/ 1 to 4
3
75
00
Display brightness
OFF, 1: minimum, 4: maximum
01
Key illumination
ON/ OFF
ON
75
02
Tuning control change per revolution
500/ 1000
1000
38
03
Tuning with MULTI/ CH control
ON/ OFF
ON
37
04
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using
the MULTI/ CH control
ON/ OFF
ON
37
05
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH
control in AM mode on the AM broadcast band
ON/ OFF
See
Reference
Page
37
06
Memory Channel
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
06A
Memory-VFO split operation
ON/ OFF
OFF
60
06B
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel
frequencies
ON/ OFF
OFF
60
07
Program scan partially slowed
ON/ OFF
ON
67
08
Slow down frequency range for the Program
scan
100/ 200/ 300/ 400/
500 Hz
300 Hz
67
09
Program scan hold
ON/ OFF
OFF
68
10
Scan resume method
TO (Time-Operated)/
CO (Carrier-Operated)
TO
68
11
Visual scan range
12
31/ 61/ 91/ 181
channels
channels
Beep output level
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum
OFF/ 1 to 9
4
74
13
TX sidetone volume
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum
OFF/ 1 to 9
5
44
14
DRU-3A playback volume
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum
OFF/ 1 to 9
4
89
15
VS-3 playback volume
OFF, 1: minimum, 9: maximum
OFF/ 1 to 9
4
91
0/ 1/ 2
0
78
ON/ OFF
OFF
78
Monitor
Sound
61
70
Audio output configuration for EXT.SP2 or
headphone
0
SP1 (L) : Main/ Sub Mix
SP2 (R): Main/ Sub Mix
1
SP1 (L) : Main
SP2 (R): Sub
2
SP1 (L) : Main + 1/4 Sub Mix
SP2 (R): Sub + 1/4 Main Mix
16
Speaker
Output
17
22
Reverses the EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 (the
headphone jack L/R channels) audio outputs
6 MENU SETUP
Group
Menu
No.
RX Antenna
18
Enable an input from the HF RX ANT connector
19
S-meter squelch
S-meter
Squelch
Function
19A
Enable S-meter squelch
19B
Hang time for S-meter squelch
Selections
Default
Ref.
Page
ON/ OFF
OFF
76
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
ON/ OFF
OFF
78
OFF/ 125/ 250/ 500
ms
OFF
78
OFF/ H BOOST/ F
PASS/ B BOOST/
CONVEN/ USER
OFF
78,
104
OFF/ H BOOST/ F
PASS/ B BOOST/
CONVEN/ USER
OFF
41,
104
2.0/ 2.2/ 2.4/ 2.6/ 2.8/
3.0 kHz
2.4 kHz
41
ON/ OFF
OFF
38
OFF/ 3/ 5/ 10/ 20/ 30
minutes
OFF
78
DSP RX equalizer
OFF:
Flat
H BOOST: High boost
20
F PASS:
Formant pass
B BOOST: Bass boost
DSP
Equalizer
CONVEN:
Conventional
USER:
Flat (Reserved for ARCP software)
DSP TX equalizer
OFF:
Flat
H BOOST: High boost
21
F PASS:
Formant pass
B BOOST: Bass boost
CONVEN:
Conventional
USER:
Flat (Reserved for ARCP software)
DSP Filter
22
DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM
Fine Tuning
23
Fine transmit power tuning
TOT
24
Time-out timer
Transverter
25
Transverter frequency display
OFF/ ON
OFF
79
Antenna
Tuner
26
TX hold when AT completes the tuning
OFF/ ON
OFF
73
27
In-line AT while receiving
OFF/ ON
OFF
73
28
Linear amplifier control
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
Linear
Amplifier
28A
Linear amplifier control delay for HF band
OFF/ 1/ 2
OFF
76
28B
Linear amplifier control delay for 50 MHz band
OFF/ 1/ 2
OFF
76
28C
Linear amplifier control delay for 144 MHz band
OFF/ 1/ 2
OFF
76
28D
Linear amplifier control delay for 430/ 440 MHz
band
OFF/ 1/ 2
OFF
76
28E
Linear amplifier control delay for 1.2 GHz band
OFF/ 1/ 2
OFF
76
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
OFF/ ON
OFF
44,
90
0 to 60 seconds
(in steps of 1 second)
10 sec.
44,
90
29
Message
Playback
Voice and CW message playback
29A
Repeat the playback
29B
Interval time for repeating the playback
23
6 MENU SETUP
Group
CW
FSK
FM
DTMF
Function
Selections
Default
Ref.
Page
30
Keying priority over playback
OFF/ ON
OFF
44
31
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency
400 to 1000 Hz
(in steps of 50 Hz)
800 Hz
30
32
CW rise time
1/ 2/ 4/ 6 ms
6 ms
77
33
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio
AUTO/ 2.5 to 4.0
(in steps of 0.1 )
AUTO
42
34
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio
OFF/ ON
OFF
42
35
Bug key mode
OFF/ ON
OFF
43
36
Auto CW TX in SSB mode
OFF/ ON
OFF
44
37
Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW
OFF/ ON
OFF
44
38
FSK shift
170/ 200/ 425/ 850 Hz
170 Hz
51
39
FSK keying polarity
NORMAL/ INVERS
NORMAL
51
40
FSK tone frequency
1275/ 2125 Hz
2125 Hz
51
41
Mic gain for FM
LOW/ MID/ HIGH
LOW
20
42
Sub-tone mode for FM
BURST/ CONT
See
reference
page
33
43
Auto repeater offset
OFF/ ON
ON
34
44
TX hold: 1750 Hz tone
OFF/ ON
OFF
33
45
DTMF functions
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
45A
DTMF number memory select
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
45B
TX speed for stored DTMF number
SLOW/ FAST
FAST
76
45C
Pause duration for stored DTMF number
100/ 250/ 500/ 750/
1000/ 1500/ 2000 ms
500 ms
76
45D
Enable Mic remote control
OFF/ ON
OFF
81
MAIN/ SUB
SUB
50
1200/ 9600 bps
1200 bps
50
TNC BAND/
MAIN & SUB
TNC
band
50
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
MANUAL/ AUTO
MANUAL
53
Menu
No.
46
MAIN/ SUB band: Internal TNC
47
Data transfer speed: Internal TNC
48
DCD sensing band
49
P.C.T. (Packet Cluster Tune) mode
49A
Packet Cluster Tune mode
49B
Packet Cluster RX confirmation tone
OFF/ MORSE/ VOICE
MORSE
53
Packet configuration
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
OFF/ ON
OFF
50
TNC
50
24
50A
Packet filter bandwidth
50B
AF input level for Packet
0 to 9 (in steps of 1)
4
50
50C
MAIN band AF output level for packet operation
0 to 9 (in steps of 1)
4
50
50D
SUB band AF output level for packet operation
0 to 9 (in steps of 1)
4
50
50E
MAIN/ SUB band: External TNC
MAIN/ SUB
MAIN
50
50F
Data transfer speed: External TNC
1200/ 9600 bps
1200 bps
50
6 MENU SETUP
Group
Selections
Default
Ref.
Page
PF key assignment
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
51A
Front panel PF key
OFF/ A.N./ B.C./ N.R./
NB/ ANT 1/2/ 1MHz/
CTRL/ CALL/ CLR/
FINE/ CH3/ CH2/
CH1/ CW TUNE/
M.IN/ M VFO/
VOICE1
SCAN/ A=B/ VFO/M/
A/B/ TF-SET/ SPLIT/
Q M.IN/ Q MR/ DSP
MONI/ RX MONI/
VOICE2/ VOICE1/
MENU 00-62
51B
Microphone PF1 (CALL) key
Same as 51A
A/B
77
51C
Microphone PF2 (VFO) key
Same as 51A
SPLIT
77
51D
Microphone PF3 (MR) key
Same as 51A
VFO/M
77
51E
Microphone PF4 (PF) key
Same as 51A
RX
MONI
77
Menu
No.
51
Function
PF keys
Master/ Slave
operation
TX Inhibit
52
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave
operation
OFF/ ON
OFF
80
53
Permit to write the transferred Split frequencies
to the target VFOs
OFF/ ON
OFF
80
54
TX inhibit
OFF/ ON
OFF
41
55
Packet communication mode
OFF/ ON
OFF
49
56
COM port communication speed
4800/ 9600/ 19200/
38400/ 57600 bps
9600
bps
50
57
APO (Auto Power Off) function
OFF/ 60/ 120/ 180
minutes
OFF
72
58
RC-2000 font in easy operation mode
FONT1/ FONT2
FONT1
98
59
RC-2000 panel/ TS-2000(X) dot-matrix display
contrast
1 to 16 (in steps of 1)
8
75
60
Display mode for RC-2000
NEGATIVE/
POSITIVE
POSITIVE
98
61
Repeater function
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
OFF/ LOCKED/
CROSS
OFF
88
OFF/ ON
OFF
88
000 to 999
000
82
Packet
APO
RC-2000
Configuration
TS-2000
Repeater
Functions
(K-type Only)
77
61A
Repeater mode select
61B
Repeater TX hold
61C
Remote control ID code
61D
Acknowledgement signal in external remote
control mode
OFF/ ON
OFF
82
61E
External remote control
OFF/ ON
OFF
82
25
6 MENU SETUP
Group
Selections
Default
Ref.
Page
Sky Command II+ configuration
Press SUB to access
the sub-menu
–
–
62A
Commander callsign for Sky Command II+
Input a callsign for the
Commander
NO
CALL
83
62B
Transporter callsign for Sky Command II+
Input a callsign for the
Transporter
NO
CALL
83
62C
Sky Command II+ tone frequency
38 CTCSS tones
88.5 Hz
83
62D
Sky Command II+ communication speed
1200/ 9600 bps
1200
bps
83
62E
Sky Command II+ mode
OFF/ CLIENT/
COMMAND/
T-PORTER
OFF
83
Menu
No.
62
Sky
Command II+
(K-type Only)
Function
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST
Function
Menu
No.
Function
DSP FILTER
AMPLIFIER
Linear amplifier control delay for HF band
Linear amplifier control delay for 50 MHz band
Linear amplifier control delay for 144 MHz
band
Linear amplifier control delay for
430/ 440 MHz band
Linear amplifier control relay for 1.2 GHz band
28A
28B
28C
28D
28E
27
26
BEEP FUNCTION
Beep output level
CW
36
35
33
32
31
37
30
34
DATA TRANSFER
Permit to write the transferred Split
frequencies to the target VFOs.
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave
operation
26
DTMF number memory select
Pause duration for stored DTMF number
TX speed for stored DTMF number
Auto repeater offset
Enable S-meter squelch for FM mode
Hang time for S-meter squelch
Mic gain for FM
Sub-tone mode for FM
TX hold: 1750 Hz tone
12
Auto CW TX in SSB mode
Bug key mode
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio
CW rise time
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency
Frequency correction for changing SSB to
CW
Keying priority over playback
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio
20
21
22
45A
45C
45B
FM
18
ANTENNA TUNER
In-line AT while receiving
TX hold when AT completes the tuning
DSP RX equalizer
DSP TX equalizer
DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM
DTMF
ANTENNA
Enable an input from the HF RX ANT
connector
Menu
No.
53
52
43
19A
19B
41
42
44
FSK
FSK keying polarity
FSK shift
FSK tone frequency
39
38
40
LCD
Display brightness
Key illumination
RC-2000 panel/ TS-2000(X) dot-matrix
display contrast
00
01
59
MEMORY FUNCTION
Memory-VFO split operation
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel
frequencies
06A
06B
6 MENU SETUP
Function
Menu
No.
Function
MESSAGE PLAYBACK
Interval time for repeating the playback
Repeat the playback
TNC
29B
29A
PF KEYS
Front panel PF key
Microphone PF1 (CALL) key
Microphone PF2 (VFO) key
Microphone PF3 (MR) key
Microphone PF4 (PF) key
51A
51B
51C
51D
51E
POWER CONTROL
Fine transmit power tuning
23
POWER ON/ OFF
APO (Auto Power Off) function
57
REMOTE CONTROL
Enable Mic remote control
Display mode for RC-2000
RC-2000 font in easy operation mode
RC-2000 panel/ TS-2000(X) dot-matrix
display contrast
45D
60
58
59
REPEATER
Acknowledgement signal in external remote
control mode
External remote control
Remote control ID code
Repeater mode select
Repeater TX hold
AF input level for Packet
COM port communication speed
Data transfer speed: External TNC
Data transfer speed: Internal TNC
DCD sensing band
Main band AF output level for packet
operation
MAIN/ SUB band: External TNC
MAIN/ SUB band: Internal TNC
Packet communication mode
Packet filter bandwidth
Packet Cluster RX confirmation tone
Packet Cluster Tune mode
Sub band AF output level for packet operation
50B
56
50F
47
48
50C
50E
46
55
50A
49B
49A
50D
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Time-out Timer
TX inhibit
24
54
TRANSVERTER
Transverter frequency display
25
TUNING CONTROL
61D
61E
61C
61A
61B
SCAN
Program scan hold
Program scan partially slowed
Slow down frequency range for the Program
scan
Scan resume method
Visual scan range
Menu
No.
09
07
08
10
11
SKY COMMAND II+
Commander callsign for Sky Command II+
Sky Command II+ communication speed
62A
62D
Sky Command II+ mode
62E
Sky Command II+ tone frequency
Transporter callsign for Sky Command II+
62C
62B
Frequency correction for changing SSB to
CW
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH
control in AM mode on the AM broadcast
band
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by
using the MULTI/ CH control
Tuning control change per revolution
Tuning with MULTI/ CH control
37
05
04
02
03
VOLUME CONTROL
Beep output level
DRU-3A playback volume
TX sidetone volume
VS-3 playback volume
12
14
13
15
SPEAKER
Audio output configuration for EXT.SP2 or
headphone
Reverses the EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 (the
headphone jack L/R channels) audio outputs
16
17
27
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SSB TRANSMISSION
FM TRANSMISSION
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF
Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes,
SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for
communications. SSB also allows long distance
communications with minimum transmit power.
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or
UHF frequencies. Many amateur radio operators use
their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM
mode. You can also utilize repeaters to reach your
friends when they are outside your antenna
coverage. Although FM requires a wider bandwidth
when compared to SSB or AM mode, it has the finest
audio quality among these modes. When combined
with the full-quieting aspect of FM signals, which
suppress background noise on the frequency, FM can
be the best method for maintaining regular schedules
with your local friends.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency.
2 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to select either lower or
upper sideband mode.
• “LSB” or “USB” appears to show which
sideband is selected.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency.
2 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
3 Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone
Gain Adjust.
• The current gain level appears.
3 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
• The MAIN band LED lights red.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
4 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
• The MAIN band LED lights red.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.
• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone or too
loudly may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end.
• You may want to use the Speech Processor.
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}
for details.
6 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7 Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjust.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on
page 37, for information on additional useful
operation functions.
28
4 Speak into the microphone in your normal tone
and level of voice.
• Speaking too close to the microphone or too
loudly may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end.
• You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM
between “LOW”, “MID”, and “HIGH” by using
Menu No. 41. “LOW” is usually appropriate;
however, select high if other stations report that
your modulation is weak. The MULTI/ CH
control has no effect in FM mode.
5 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on
page 37, for additional information on useful
operation functions.
Note: Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no effect in
FM mode. In FM mode, you must select “LOW”, “MID” or “HIGH” in
Menu No. 41.
7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
AM TRANSMISSION
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its
own advantages. Although long distance DX
contacts may be less common while using AM, the
superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation
is one reason why some hams prefer this mode.
When operating in FM mode, you can select wide or
narrow bandwidth operation. The table below shows
the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation
combination for each operating mode. The
bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion
or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will
encounter.
When looking for others operating on AM, check the
following frequencies first:
3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz, 21390 kHz, and
29000 ~ 29200 kHz
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency.
2 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode.
• “AM” appears.
Mode
RX IF Filter
TX Deviation
FM
Wide
Wide
FMN
1
Narrow
1
Narrow
K-type: Main transceiver only.
All E-types: Main transceiver and sub-receiver.
1 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
2 Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the
selection between Wide and Narrow.
• “FM” or “FMN” appears to indicate which
bandwidth is selected.
3 Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone
Gain Adjust.
• The current gain level appears.
4 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
• The MAIN band LED lights red.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power
meter slightly reflects your voice level.
• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone or too
loudly may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end.
• You may want to use the Speech Processor.
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}
for details.
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM
When receiving AM on the main transceiver, you can
further decrease the bandwidth to eliminate
interference. However, the TX deviation of AM is not
affected by this selection.
1 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode on the
main transceiver.
2 Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the
selection between Normal and Narrow.
• “AM” or “AMN” appears to indicate which IF
bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver.
6 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7 Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjust.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on
page 37, for information on additional useful
operation functions.
Note: If necessary, adjust the carrier level before speaking into the
microphone. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment
mode. While transmitting only carrier signals, turn the MULTI/ CH
control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate. Press [FUNC],
[MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.
29
7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
CW TRANSMISSION
AUTO ZERO-BEAT
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable
when communicating under worst conditions. It may
be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being
equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,
however, do not have the long history of service nor
the simplicity that CW provides.
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a
CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly
matches your transmit frequency with the station you
are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your
chances of being heard by the other station.
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that
supports a variety of functions. For details on using
these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”
{page 42}.
1 Press [FUNC], [RIT/ CW TUNE] to start Auto
Zero-beat.
• “CW TUNE” appears.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select the operating frequency.
2 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
•
•
•
•
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto
Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”
{below}.
3 Press [SEND].
• The MAIN band LED lights red.
• Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 42} for
information on automatic TX/ RX switching.
4 Begin sending.
• As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone
that lets you monitor your own transmission.
Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH
FREQUENCY” {below}.
5 Press [SEND] to return to receive mode.
• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press
[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With the key
down, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads within
the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit. Press
[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.
Your transmit frequency automatically changes
so that the pitch of the received signal exactly
matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency
that you have selected. Refer to “TX
SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.
When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”
disappears.
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous
frequency is restored.
2 To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [FUNC],
[RIT/ CW TUNE] or [CLR].
Note:
◆ You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or
wider for the DSP filter bandwidth.
◆ When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within ±50 Hz
in most cases.
◆ Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is
too slow or when some interference is present.
◆ When RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change to make
the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY
As you send CW, you will hear tones from the
transceiver speaker. These are called transmit (TX)
sidetones. Listening to these tones, you can monitor
what you are transmitting. You may also use the
tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing,
the keyer is functioning, or to practice sending without
actually putting a signal on the air.
Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you
hear after tuning in a CW station.
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and
receive pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu
No. 31 to select the frequency that is most
comfortable for you. The selectable range is from
400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz.
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access
Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and
OFF.
Note: The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls do not
affect the volume of the TX sidetone.
30
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)
Usually you can communicate with other stations
using a single frequency for receiving and
transmitting. In this case, you select only one
frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there
are cases where you must select one frequency for
receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.
This requires the use of two VFOs. This is referred to
as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case
which requires this type of operation is when you use
an FM repeater {page 32}. Another typical case is
when you call a rare DX station.
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit
frequency and receive frequency. Canceling this
function immediately restores the original transmit and
receive frequencies. By activating TF-SET, you can
listen on your transmit frequency, and change it while
listening. This allows you to check whether or not the
newly selected transmit frequency is free of
interference.
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that
operator may immediately get many simultaneous
responses. Often, such a station is lost under the
noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you
find that you are suddenly being called by many
operators, it is your responsibility to control the
situation. You may announce that you will be “listening
up 5 (kHz, from your present transmit frequency)”, or
“listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.
1 Press [MAIN], [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B on
the main transceiver.
•
“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select an operating frequency.
• The frequency selected at this point will be
used for transmitting.
• To copy the selected VFO frequency to the
other VFO, press [A=B].
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4 Select an operating frequency.
• The frequency selected on this VFO will be
used for receiving.
5 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
•
Each press of [A/B] reverses the receive and
transmit frequencies.
1 Configure split-frequency operation as explained
in the previous section.
2 Press and hold [TF-SET].
3 While holding down [TF-SET], change the
operating frequency by turning the Tuning control
or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
• The transceiver receives on the frequency that
you select, but the frequency shown on the
sub-display stays unchanged.
4 Release [TF-SET].
• You are now receiving again on your original
receive frequency.
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often
depends on making a well-timed call on a clear
frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively
clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact
instant when the DX station is listening but the
majority of the groups aren’t transmitting. Switch
your receive and transmit frequencies by using TFSET and listen. You will soon learn the rhythm of the
DX station and the pileup. The more proficient you
become at using this function, the more DX stations
you will contact.
Note:
◆ If you press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to lock the operating
frequency before using TF-SET, pressing an incorrect button by
mistake retains the original receive frequency.
◆ TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.
◆ If you have recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 290 to
299), you cannot change the recalled frequency using the
Tuning control.
◆ To enable the Tuning control, access Menu No. 06B and select
“ON”. Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] after recalling a memory
channel changes the memory channels.
◆ An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT frequency
shift is added to the transmit frequency.
6 To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]
again.
• “SPLIT” disappears.
If you access Menu No. 06A and select “ON”, you can
recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or
transmitting. For more information, refer to “MemoryVFO Split Operation” {page 60} under “MEMORY
FEATURES”.
Note: You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub-receiver; it
has only one VFO.
31
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
■ Selecting an Offset Direction
FM REPEATER OPERATION
When using FM mode, you may access a repeater to
enjoy long distance communications. Repeaters,
which are often installed and maintained by radio
clubs, are usually located on mountain tops or other
elevated locations. Generally they operate at higher
ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical
station. This combination of elevation and high ERP
allows communications in FM over much greater
distances than FM communications without using
repeaters.
Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency
pair with an offset. In addition, some repeaters must
receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows
access. Repeaters are available on the 29, 50, 144,
430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands (TS-2000/
TS-B2000 Optional). For further information,
including repeater frequencies, consult your local
repeater reference.
This transceiver provides the following three methods
for programming two separate frequencies:
• Using the Split-Frequency function {page 31}
• Programming an offset (29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz
and 1.2 GHz bands)
• Storing in a Split-Frequency channel {page 59}
Note:
◆ When programming two separate frequencies using two VFOs,
be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.
◆ When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by
speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to
“talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
29.620 MHz
1 Select a receive frequency.
2 Press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] to switch the offset
direction.
• Select whether the transmit frequency will
be higher (+) or lower (–) than the receive
frequency.
• “+” or “–” appears to indicate which offset
direction is selected.
•
To program the –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or
–6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset on all E-types,
repeatedly press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] until
“=” appears.
If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the
allowable range, transmitting is inhibited. Use one
of the following methods to bring the transmit
frequency within the band limits:
• Move the receive frequency further inside the
band.
• Change the offset direction.
Note:
◆ You can only change the offset direction while in FM mode.
◆ While using an odd-split memory channel for transmitting,
you cannot change the offset direction.
■ Selecting an Offset Frequency
29.620 MHz
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
To access a repeater which requires an odd-split
frequency pair, change the offset frequency from
the default which is used by most repeaters. The
default offset frequencies are as follows.
Band
144 MHz
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET
When using the 29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz or 1.2 GHz
band (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional), selecting a single
frequency and an offset is another method for
programming two separate frequencies. Unlike the
Split-Frequency function, this method requires only a
single VFO.
Note: If you store offset settings in a memory channel, you need not
reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.
K-type
All E-types
±600 kHz
430/ 440 MHz
±5.0 MHz
1.2 GHz
±12.0 MHz
±1.6 MHz
–7.6 MHz
±35.0 MHz
–6.0 MHz
As for the 29 and 50 MHz bands, the default offset
is set to 0 MHz (Simplex). Program the desired
offset frequency for these bands.
1 Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET].
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate offset frequency.
• The selectable range is from 0.00 MHz to
59.95 MHz in steps of 50 kHz.
3 Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] again to
complete the setting.
All E-types only: If you have selected “ =” for the offset
direction, you cannot change the default (–7.6 MHz or –6.0 MHz).
32
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSMITTING A TONE
Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to
transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other
repeaters on the same frequency from locking each
other up. The required tone frequency differs among
repeaters. Repeaters also differ in their requirements
for either continuous or burst tones. For the
appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters,
consult your local repeater reference.
After completing the tone settings, pressing [SEND]
or pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes the
transceiver to transmit the selected tone. If you have
selected a 1750 Hz tone, press [4/ TONE/SEL] to
transmit the tone without pressing Mic [PTT].
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need not
reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.
■ Activating the Tone Function
1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on
the VFO(s).
• When using two VFOs, you must select FM
mode on both VFOs.
2 Press [4/ TONE/SEL] to switch the Tone
function ON (or OFF).
• “T” appears when the function is ON.
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
01
67.0
11
97.4
21
136.5
31
192.8
02
71.9
12
100.0
22
141.3
32
203.5
03
74.4
13
103.5
23
146.2
33
210.7
04
77.0
14
107.2
24
151.4
34
218.1
05
79.7
15
110.9
25
156.7
35
225.7
06
82.5
16
114.8
26
162.2
36
233.6
07
85.4
17
118.8
27
167.9
37
241.8
08
88.5
18
123.0
28
173.8
38
250.3
09
91.5
19
127.3
29
179.9
39
1750
10
94.8
20
131.8
30
186.2
Note:
◆ Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting
tone frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
◆ You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS
frequency.
■ Selecting Continuous or Burst
Access Menu No. 42 to select “Continuous” or
“Burst”. With Continuous selected, the transceiver
sends the tone continuously during the
transmission. With Burst selected, the transceiver
sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission
starts. When using the 144, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2
GHz band, continuous tones are always
transmitted, regardless of the selection.
■ Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone
Note:
◆ You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or DCS
functions.
◆ You need to activate the Tone function only when selecting
one of the 38 standard frequencies. The selection you make
here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone.
■ Selecting a Tone Frequency
1 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].
• The current tone frequency appears. The
default is 88.5 Hz.
Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to
transmit a 1750 Hz tone. With 1750 Hz tone
selected, pressing [4/ TONE/SEL] causes the
transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone.
Releasing the key ceases transmission of the
code. Some repeaters in Europe must receive
continuous signals for a certain period of time,
following a 1750 Hz tone. This transceiver is
capable of remaining in transmit mode for
2 seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone.
Access Menu No. 44 and select “ON”.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate tone frequency.
• The available tone frequencies are listed in
the following table.
3 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL] to complete the
setting.
33
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
This function automatically selects an offset direction,
according to the frequency that you select on the
144 MHz band. The transceiver is programmed for
offset directions as shown below. To obtain an up-todate band plan for repeater offset direction, contact
your national Amateur Radio association.
ASC functions only when you have programmed an
offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz or 1.2 GHz
(Optional) band. While using a repeater, ASC
periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you
receive directly from the other station. If the station’s
signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without
a repeater, the ASC indicator on the display starts to
blink.
Access Menu No. 43 and switch the function ON or
OFF. The default is ON.
K-type (U.S.A. and Canada versions)
This complies with the standard ARRL band plan.
144.0
145.5
146.4
147.0
147.6
145.1
146.0
146.6
147.4
148.0 MHz
S
−
+
S
S
−
+
S
Press and hold [TF-SET] for approximately 1 second
to switch the function ON.
• The “[R]” indicator appears when the function is
ON.
−
S: Simplex
All E-types (European versions)
145.6 145.8 146.0 MHz
144.0
S
–
S
S: Simplex
Note:
◆ Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse is
ON. However, pressing [TF-SET] after Automatic Repeater
Offset has selected an offset (split) status, exchanges the receive
and transmit frequencies.
◆ If you change the offset direction by pressing
[0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON, the
Shift direction on the above figure is applied when you change
the frequencies.
REVERSE FUNCTION
After programming an offset on the 29, 50, 144,
430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz (Optional) band, the
reverse function exchanges a separate receive and
transmit frequency. So, while using a repeater, you
can manually check the strength of a signal that you
receive directly from the other station. If the station’s
signal is strong, both stations should move to a
simplex frequency to free up the repeater.
Press [TF-SET] to switch the Reverse function ON
(or OFF) while the Shift function is active.
• “R” appears when the Reverse function is ON.
Note:
◆ If you press [TF-SET] and try to receive outside the available
receive frequency, the transceiver will not allow you to tune the
frequency. The Reverse function will not operate.
◆ Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse is
ON.
◆ You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting.
34
•
•
When direct contact is possible, the “[R]” indicator
blinks.
To quit the function, press [TF-SET].
Note:
◆ Pressing Mic [PTT] causes the ASC indicator to stop blinking.
◆ ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies
are the same (simplex operation).
◆ ASC does not function while scanning.
◆ Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF.
◆ If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has the
Reverse status ON, ASC is switched OFF.
◆ ASC causes received audio to be momentarily intermitted every
3 seconds.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all tone frequencies to
identify the incoming tone frequency on a received
signal. You can use this function to find which tone
frequency is required by your local repeater.
1 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].
• The current tone frequency appears.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the Tone
Freq. ID.
• “T” blinks and every Tone frequency is
scanned. When the Tone frequency is
identified, the transceiver stops scanning and
the identified frequency is displayed.
•
•
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume
scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the Tone frequency ID scan is active.
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from
specific persons. When using FM mode, the
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)
allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from
other persons who are using the same frequency. A
CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from
among the 38 standard tone frequencies. Select the
same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your
group. You will not hear calls from stations other than
those using the same CTCSS tone.
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private. It
only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
No.
Freq.
(Hz)
01
67.0
11
97.4
21
136.5
31
192.8
02
71.9
12
100.0
22
141.3
32
203.5
03
74.4
13
103.5
23
146.2
33
210.7
04
77.0
14
107.2
24
151.4
34
218.1
05
79.7
15
110.9
25
156.7
35
225.7
06
82.5
16
114.8
26
162.2
36
233.6
07
85.4
17
118.8
27
167.9
37
241.8
08
88.5
18
123.0
28
173.8
38
250.3
09
91.5
19
127.3
29
179.9
10
94.8
20
131.8
30
186.2
3 Select an operating frequency.
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is
received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press
and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
4 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed
the appropriate CTCSS frequency.
2 Select a band.
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.
6 Press [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to switch the CTCSS
function ON (or OFF).
• “C T” appears when the function is ON.
Note:
◆ When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on both
VFOs to use CTCSS.
◆ Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table above when selecting
CTCSS frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
◆ You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone
frequency.
◆ You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone or DCS
functions.
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN
7 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].
• The current CTCSS frequency appears. The
default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to
identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received
signal. You may find this useful when you cannot
recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in
your group are using.
1 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].
• The current CTCSS frequency appears.
8 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate CTCSS frequency.
• The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in
the following table.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the CTCSS
Freq. ID scan.
• “C T” blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency
is scanned. When the CTCSS frequency is
identified, the transceiver stops scanning and
the identified frequency is displayed.
9 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to complete the
setting.
•
•
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume
scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the CTCSS tone frequency ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
35
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM DCS OPERATION
Digital Code Squelch (DCS) is another FM application
which allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls.
It functions the same way as CTCSS. The only
differences are the encode/ decode method and the
number of selectable codes. For DCS, you can select
from 104 different codes listed in the table below.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select a band.
3 Select an operating frequency.
You will hear calls only when the selected code is
received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press
and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the
appropriate DCS code.
Note: You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all DCS codes to identify
the incoming DCS code on a received signal. You
may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS
code that the other persons in your group are using.
1 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].
• The current DCS code appears.
4 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the DCS Code
ID scan.
• “DCS” blinks and every DCS code is scanned.
When the DCS code is identified, the
transceiver stops scanning and the identified
DCS ID is displayed.
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.
6 Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to switch the DCS function
ON (or OFF).
• “DCS” appears when the function is ON.
•
•
7 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].
• The current DCS code appears. The default is
023.
8 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate DCS code.
• The available DCS codes are listed in the
following table.
023
025
026
031
032
036
043
047
051
053
054
065
071
072
073
074
114
115
116
122
125
131
132
134
143
145
152
155
156
162
165
172
174
205
212
223
225
226
243
244
245
246
251
252
255
261
263
265
266
271
274
306
311
315
325
331
332
343
346
351
356
364
365
371
411
412
413
423
431
432
445
446
452
454
455
462
464
465
466
503
506
516
523
526
532
546
565
606
612
624
627
631
632
654
662
664
703
712
723
731
732
734
743
754
9 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL] again to complete
the setting.
36
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to resume scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the DCS code ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing
Mic [UP]/ [DWN], there are several other ways to
select your frequency. This section describes
additional methods of frequency selection that may
save you time and effort.
■ Using 1 MHz Steps
Pressing [+]/ [–] on the front panel changes
Amateur bands. You can also use the MULTI/ CH
control to change the operating frequency in steps
of 1 MHz.
1 Press [1MHz/ SEL].
• “MHz” appears.
■ Direct Frequency Entry
When the desired frequency is far removed from
the current frequency, directly entering a
frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the
fastest method.
1 Press [ENT].
• “- - - . - - - . - - ” appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control.
• Clockwise increases the frequency, counterclockwise decreases the frequency.
3 Press [1MHz/ SEL] to exit the function.
• “MHz” disappears.
2 Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter
your desired frequency.
• Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining digits (the
digits you did not enter) with 0 and
completes the entry.
• To select 1.85 MHz for example, press [0],
[0], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to
complete the input (7 key strokes).
• To shorten the key strokes, you can also
use [•] as MHz. Press [1], [•] (MHz), [8],
[5], then press [ENT] to complete the input
(5 key strokes).
• Pressing [CLR] cancels the entry and
restores the current VFO frequency.
Note:
◆
◆
You can enter the frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz to
1299.99999 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the
available frequency range.
Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the
selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound.
The entered frequency is rejected.
◆
When the entered frequency does not meet the current
VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest
available frequency is automatically selected (subreceiver). The nearest available frequency is
automatically selected after the entered frequency is
changed (main transceiver).
◆
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the
digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit, and
frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not
displayed.
◆
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be
switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not
cleared.
◆
After recalling memory channels 290 to 299 that have
Start and End frequencies stored, the receive frequency
can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within
the programmed range.
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of
100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz, press
[FUNC], [1MHz/ SEL] then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz.
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the [1MHz/ SEL]
key, the MHz icon appears.
■ Quick QSY
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the
MULTI/ CH control. Turning this control changes
the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/
CW/ FSK and 10 kHz for FM/ AM (below 60 MHz).
• If you want to change the default frequency
step size, press [FUNC], [9/ FINE/STEP].
Select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz or
100 kHz for FM/ AM, and 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other modes. The
default step size is 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK/
AM and 10 kHz for FM (below 60 MHz).
• When changing the operating frequency by
using the MULTI/ CH control, frequencies are
rounded such that new frequencies are
multiples of the frequency step size. To cancel
this function, access Menu No. 04 and select
“OFF” (default is ON).
• Within the AM broadcast band, the step size
automatically defaults to the frequency step
value in Menu No. 05. This step size can be
switched between 9 kHz (all E-types: ON) and
5 kHz (K-type: OFF) via Menu No. 05.
Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH
control is stored independently for the HF/ 50 MHz, 144 MHz,
430/ 440 MHz and 1.2 GHz bands (main transceiver). You can
also set a different frequency step size for SSB, CW, FSK, AM
and FM modes. The sub-receiver also stores the independent
frequency step size for 118 MHz (K-type only), 144 MHz,
300 MHz (K-type only), and 430/ 440 MHz bands. You can also
set a different frequency step size for FM and AM.
37
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
■ Fine Tuning
The default step value when turning the Tuning
control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB,
CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM
modes. However, you can change the step size to
1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 10 Hz for
FM and AM modes.
1 Press [9/ FINE/STEP].
• “FINE” appears.
3 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your receive
frequency.
4 To turn off RIT, press [RIT/ CW TUNE].
• The receive frequency is returned to the
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
Note:
◆ RIT works only on the main transceiver.
◆ When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with RIT
function ON, RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/ from
the VFO frequency. Then the calculated data is stored in the
Memory channel.
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the
time constant for the automatic gain control circuit.
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact
frequency.
3 To quit the function, press [9/ FINE/STEP]
again.
• “FINE” disappears.
Note:
◆ Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver.
◆ If Menu No. 03 is ON, you cannot perform fine tuning in FM
mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz/
430/ 440 MHz/ 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 optional) bands.
■ Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)
This function allows you to copy the frequency and
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive
VFO.
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or
VFO B.
2 Press [A=B].
• The frequency and mode selected in step 1
are copied to the inactive VFO.
3 Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was
copied.
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)
RIT provides the ability to change your receive
frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without
changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning
([9/ FINE/STEP]) function is ON, the step size
becomes 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all
modulation modes and while using VFO or Memory
Recall mode.
1 Press [RIT/ CW TUNE].
• “RIT” and the RIT offset appear.
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large
input changes. A fast time constant causes the
receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to
changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is
particularly useful in the following situations:
• Tuning rapidly
• Receiving weak signals
• Receiving high-speed CW
Unlike other transceivers, the TS-2000’s digital AGC
circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from
slow to fast in 20 steps, where 1 is the slowest and
20 is the fastest. Furthermore, you can switch the
AGC OFF if you desire.
For your convenience, the following default AGC time
constant has already been programmed.
SSB: Level 7
CW: Level 12
FSK: Level 14
AM: Level 5
To change the default time constant:
1 Press [8/ AGC/OFF].
• The AGC time constant scale appears on the
sub dot-matrix display.
2 To select a slower time constant, turn the
MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise. The bar
indicator moves from F(ast) to S(low). To select
a faster time constant, turn the MULTI/ CH
control clockwise. The bar indicator moves from
S(low) to F(ast).
3 If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press [FUNC],
[8/ AGC/OFF].
Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub-receiver.
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset
to 0.
38
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
TRANSMITTING
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching
to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit.
The transceiver automatically switches to transmit
mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have
begun speaking into the microphone.
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing
between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop
back to receive mode briefly. You will then hear if
anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short
period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.
Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as
well as respect your more articulate conversation.
■ Delay Time
If the transceiver returns to receive mode too
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word
may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an
appropriate delay time that allows all of your
words to be transmitted without an overly long
delay after you stop speaking.
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX
function ON.
3 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].
• The current setting appears on the sub dotmatrix display. The default is 50.
VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for
CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.
Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to toggle between VOX ON and
OFF.
• The VOX LED lights.
■ Microphone Input Level
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to
properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This
level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to
detect the presence or absence of your voice. In
CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.
4 While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the MULTI/ CH
control such that the transceiver switches to
receive mode after you have stopped talking.
• The selectable range is from 5 to 100
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.
5 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to set the VOX
delay.
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX
function ON.
• The VOX LED lights.
3 Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL].
• The current VOX gain appears on the sub
dot-matrix display.
4 While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default
is 4) using the MULTI/ CH control until the
transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode
each time you speak.
• The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.
• The setting should not allow background
noise to switch the transceiver to transmit
mode.
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is
switched OFF or while you are transmitting.
39
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
SPEECH PROCESSOR
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in
your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or
AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the
average transmit output power, resulting in a more
understandable signal. The amount of voice
compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that
using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be
heard by distant stations.
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your
transmit frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz
without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine
Tuning function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.
1 Press [XIT/ ALT].
• “XIT” and the XIT offset appear.
Transmit power
Speech
Processor
OFF
Time
3 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your transmit
frequency.
Transmit power
Speech
Processor
ON
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset
to 0.
Time
4 To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT/ ALT].
• The transmit frequency is returned to the
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Press [PROC/ LEVEL] to switch the Speech
Processor ON.
• The PROC LED lights.
3 Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to enter the
Speech Processor input level adjustment mode.
4 As you speak into the microphone, turn the
MULTI/ CH control so that the compression
meter indicates that the compression level is
around 10 dB while you speak.
• Using higher compression will not improve your
signal clarity or apparent signal strength.
Excessively compressed signals are more
difficult to understand due to distortion and are
less pleasant to hear than signals with less
compression.
5 Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to exit the Speech
Processor input level adjustment.
6 Press [MIC/ CAR] to enter the Speech processor
output level Adjustment.
• As you speak into the microphone, turn the
MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter
reflects according to your voice level but does
not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/ CAR] to
exit when you finish the adjustment.
40
Note:
◆ XIT works only on the main transceiver.
◆ The frequency shift set by the RIT/ SUB control is also used by
the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset
also affects the RIT offset.
◆ When the XIT frequency exceeds the limit of available
transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops
transmitting.
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
Frequency Response Curves
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude
The quality of your transmitted signal is important,
regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.
However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact
since you don’t listen to your own signal. The
following sub-sections provide information that will
help you tailor your transmitted signal.
Conventional
Formant pass
High boost
Off
Bass boost
■ TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM)
Use Menu No. 22 to select one of the following
transmit bandwidths: 2.0 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz
(default), 2.6 kHz, 2.8 kHz, or 3.0 kHz.
1
Bandwidth
Passband frequency
2.0 kHz
500 ~ 2500 Hz
2.2 kHz
400 ~ 2600 Hz
2.4 kHz
300 ~ 2700 Hz
2.6 kHz
200 ~ 2800 Hz
1
2.8 kHz
100 ~ 2900 Hz
3.0 kHz
10 ~ 3000 Hz 1
If the Speech Processor is ON, the low-cut filter is set to 200 Hz
for 2.8 kHz and 3.0 kHz.
■ TX Equalizer (SSB/ FM/ AM)
0.7
2.2
Audio
frequency
(kHz)
TRANSMIT INHIBIT
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being
placed in transmit mode. No signal can be
transmitted when this function is ON even if the PTT
or [SEND] is pressed.
• TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.
• TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 54. The
default is OFF.
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING
Use Menu No. 21 to change the transmit frequency
characteristics of your signal. You can select from
one of six different transmit profiles including the
default flat response. Selecting any of the following
items from the Menu causes “
” to appear on
the display.
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually
an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with
other stations. However, if necessary, by using the
Tuning control you can change the operating
frequency while transmitting. You also can change
the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode.
•
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside
the transmit frequency range, the transceiver is
automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected
transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will
not resume until you select a frequency inside the
transmit frequency range, at which time you must
press [SEND] again.
Off (OFF):
The default frequency response for SSB, FM,
and AM.
•
High boost (H BOOST):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective
for a bassy voice.
•
Formant pass (F PASS):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency
range.
•
Bass boost (B BOOST):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective
for a voice with more high frequency
components.
•
Conventional (CONVEN):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz
and higher.
•
User (USER):
Reserved for the optional ARCP software. Off
is programmed at the factory as a default.
41
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
CW BREAK-IN
CHANGING KEYING SPEED
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually
switching between transmit and receive modes. Two
types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in and
Full Break-in.
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is
important in order to send error-free CW that other
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.
You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed
that is close to the speed used by the other station.
Semi Break-in:
When the key contacts open, the transceiver
automatically waits for the passage of the time period
that you have selected. The transceiver then returns
to receive mode.
Full Break-in:
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver
returns to receive mode.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 Press [KEY/ DELAY].
• The current keying speed appears. The default
is 20 (WPM).
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL].
• The VOX LED lights.
3 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].
• The current setting (Full or delay time)
appears. The default is Full Break-in.
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the
transmit sidetone, turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the appropriate speed.
• The speeds range from 10 (WPM) to 60 (WPM),
in steps of 1. The larger the number, the faster
the speed.
4 Press [KEY/ DELAY] again to complete the
setting.
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the selected
speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Full Break-in
or a delay time for Semi Break-in.
• Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to
1000 ms) in steps of 5.
5 Begin sending.
• The transceiver automatically switches to
transmit mode.
• When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected:
The transceiver immediately switches to
receive mode when the key opens.
• When a delay time is selected:
The transceiver switches to receive mode after
the delay time that you have selected has
passed.
6 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] again.
Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A linear
amplifier.
ELECTRONIC KEYER
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that
can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the
transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW
(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 3} for details regarding
this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic
operation.
42
AUTO WEIGHTING
The electronic keyer can automatically change the
dot/dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash
length to dot length. The weighting changes with
your keying speed, thus making your keying easier
for other operators to copy.
Use Menu No. 33 to select AUTO, or 2.5 ~ 4.0 (in
steps of 0.1) fix weight ratio. The default is AUTO.
When the fix weight ratio is selected, the dot/dash
weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed.
■ Reverse Keying Weight Ratio
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you
increase your keying speed. However, the
electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting
as you increase your keying speed.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 34,
and select ON. The default is OFF.
Reverse
Keying
Weight
OFF
ON
Keying Speed (WPM)
10 ~ 25
1:2.8
1:3.2
26 ~ 45
1:3.0
1:3.0
46 ~ 60
1:3.2
1:2.8
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
BUG KEY FUNCTION
The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a
semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also
known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are
generated in the normal manner by the electronic
keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by
the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for
the appropriate length of time.
4 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.
• The message you send is stored in memory.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 35, and
select ON. The default is OFF.
5 To complete the message storage, press [CLR]
to stop.
• When the memory becomes full, recording
automatically stops.
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory
(see below) cannot be used.
Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to
record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.
CW MESSAGE MEMORY
This transceiver has three memory channels for
storing CW messages. Each memory channel can
store approximately 50 characters (equivalent of 250
dots). These memory channels are ideal for storing
contest exchanges that you want to send repeatedly.
Stored messages can be played back to check
message content or for transmitting.
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you
to interrupt playback and manually inject your own
keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu
No. 30, and select ON. The default is OFF.
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back
the message that you stored. To switch this function
ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON. The
default is OFF.
For repetitive message playback, you can change
the interval between each series of messages.
Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the
range of 0 to 60 seconds.
■ Checking CW Messages without Transmitting
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch it
OFF.
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back.
• The message is played back.
•
•
Note:
◆
◆
This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is
ON.
Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 30 OFF cancels
message playback. Even if message playback does not stop
because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback
by pressing [CLR].
■ Storing CW Messages
•
To play back the messages stored in the
other channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel keys during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
While playing back the messages, you can
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing
[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH
control.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
■ Transmitting CW Messages
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Breakin/ Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL].
• The VOX LED turns off.
2 To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press
[VOX/ LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights.
Otherwise, press [SEND].
3 Press [FUNC] and [1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/ REC], or [3/ CH3/REC] to select a
memory channel to be recorded.
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back.
• The message is played back and
transmitted automatically.
•
To transmit the messages stored in the
other channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel keys during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
43
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
•
•
While playing back the messages, you can
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing
[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH
control.
To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].
4 If you pressed [SEND] in step 2, press [SEND]
again to return to receive mode.
■ Changing the Inter-message Interval Time
For the message playback repeat, select Menu
No. 29A and set it ON. You can also change the
interval playback time of the message. Use
Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range
of 0 to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.
Note: Menu Nos. 29A and 29B settings are shared with the
voice communication modes when the optional DRU-3A is
installed.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 37.
2 Press [+] to select ON.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
CW REVERSE (RECEIVE)
This function pivots the BFO from the default position
(USB) to another position (LSB) in CW mode. It is
sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals
from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO.
1 Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV].
•
“CWR” appears.
3 To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],
[CW/ FSK/ REV] again.
■ Changing the Sidetone Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not
change the CW sidetone playback volume. To
change the CW sidetone volume, access Menu
No. 13 and select OFF, or 1 to 9.
■ Insert Keying
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing
back a recorded CW message, the transceiver
stops playing back the message. However, during
contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes
want to insert a different number or message at a
certain point in the recorded message.
In this case, first record the CW message as usual
{page 43}, without the number or message you
want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 30 and
select ON.
Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play
back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses
the playback of the recorded message, instead of
stopping it. When you finish sending the number
or message with the keyer, the transceiver
resumes playback of the message.
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would
sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to
watch and listen CW signals. It is fine just to
monitor those CW signals but you have experienced
that changing the mode from SSB to CW results
losing the target CW signal. This is because the
frequency on the display always shows the true
carrier frequency for all modes. If you want the
transceiver to shift the receiving frequency to trace
the receiving CW signal when changing the mode
from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW, switch this function
ON. The transceiver shifts the receiving frequency
when changing the mode from SSB to CW. So, you
can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit
the signal in CW, without adjusting the frequency.
44
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can
configure the transceiver to change the operating
mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then
transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW
keyers.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 36.
2 Press [+] to select ON.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
Note: You must switch the CW break-in function ON to change the
mode and transmit in CW mode {page 42}.
SUB-RECEIVER
SUB-RECEIVER
RECEIVING
The TS-2000(X) transceiver is equipped with
2 independent receivers. The main transceiver can
receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band (or 1.2 GHz
band if the optional UT-20 is installed) while the subreceiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on
the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440MHz) band.
ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER
You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local
repeater activities or your club channel while you are
operating on the HF/ 50MHz or VHF/ UHF/ (Optional
1.2 GHz) bands with the main transceiver.
Since the TS-2000 also has a built-in TNC, you can
assign the sub-receiver to monitor the local DX
Packet Cluster channel activities without using an
external TNC. If a new DX station is reported to the
DX Packet Cluster, the transceiver automatically
displays the DX station data. If desired, you can
further transfer the DX frequency information to the
main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact
with the DX station {page 53}.
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND
In this manual, the frequency on the left of the display
is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on
the right is called the SUB band.
To understand how to control the MAIN band and
SUB band frequencies and functions, please note the
differences between the TX band and the Control
band, below.
Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub-receiver
ON or OFF. The orange LED above the SUB AF/ SQL
control lights when the sub-receiver is switched ON.
Note: When switching the sub-receiver ON or OFF, you may hear a
popping sound from the speaker. This is not a malfunction.
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER
To control all the available functions of the subreceiver, press [SUB] to transfer the controls and
transmission capability to the sub-receiver. The “ ”
and “
” icons move from the main transceiver to the
sub-receiver. When you press [SEND] or Mic [PTT],
the transceiver transmits on the SUB band frequency.
Or, if you would like to transmit and receive on the
MAIN band while adjusting the sub-receiver
functions, simply press [CTRL]. Only the “
” icon
moves from the main transceiver display to the sub
display. The “ ” icon remains on the main
transceiver display. With this setup, you can continue
receiving and transmitting on the main transceiver
VFO frequencies while you are making adjustments
to the sub-receiver functions.
TX BAND
Press [MAIN] to display the “
” and “
” icons on
the MAIN band. When “
” is on the MAIN band
display, the MAIN band is currently selected as the
transmission band. You can use the MAIN band
frequency to transmit signals or to control the main
transceiver functions.
If you press [SUB], the “
” and “
” icons move to
the SUB band display. This means that the SUB
band is now selected as the transmission band and
controls the functions. You can use the SUB band
frequency to transmit signals or control the sub
receiver functions.
If you need to adjust only the frequency of the subreceiver, you can simply turn the RIT/ SUB control.
However, this works only when you are operating the
main transceiver without the RIT/ XIT functions.
When operating the main transceiver with the RIT/
XIT function, first switch OFF the RIT/ XIT function by
pressing [RIT/ CW TUNE] and/or [XIT/ ALT], or press
[CTRL] to move the controls to the SUB band. Then
turn the Tuning control, the MULTI/ CH control or the
RIT/ SUB control to adjust the SUB band frequency.
CONTROL BAND
SELECTING A BAND
On some occasions, you may need to adjust the
frequency and/ or functions for the band you are not
transmitting on. To do this, press [CTRL]. For
example, if both “ ” and “
” are on the MAIN
band display, pressing [CTRL] will move “ ” to the
SUB band display. “
” remains on the MAIN band
display. This allows you to continue transmitting on
the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of the
sub-receiver.
Press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function
controls to the sub-receiver.
Press [+]/ [–] to select the 144 MHz or the
430/ 440 MHz band.
45
10 SUB-RECEIVER
•
•
Holding down the key changes the bands
continuously.
If “MHz” is visible on the display, first press
[1MHz/ SEL] to exit from the 1 MHz Step Up/
Down mode.
The “ ” and “
” icons are both on the subreceiver display:
• You can do all the above, plus transmit on the
SUB band frequency.
This transceiver provides many other methods for
selecting a frequency quickly. For further details, refer
to “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.
SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the
audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the
level.
SUB
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT
XIT
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
AF
CLEAR
9.6k STA CON
RIT/SUB
_
The multifunction meter measures the parameters
described in the table below. The S-meter appears
when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears
when in transmit mode. Peak readings for the
S- meter and PWR functions are held momentarily.
Scale
Display
Function State
S
Received signal strength
Receive
PWR
Transmit output power
Transmit
+
P.C.T
SET
SUB
QUICK MEMO
TFSET
C.IN
MENU
CALL
UTO
SB
SB
MAIN
MANUAL BC RF GAIN
MULTI CH
M.IN
MR
Note: Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
SATL
SQL
M/S
MAIN
SUB
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
SEL
1MHz
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
SUB
AF
A=B
SQL
MG.SEL
M VFO
MAIN
M.IN
Note: The position of the SUB AF control does not affect the volume
of beeps caused by pressing buttons. The audio level for Packet
operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting.
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH
Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals
are present, to select the squelch level at which
background noise is just eliminated. The SUB band
LED turns off when the squelch is ON.
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
When you operate both the main transceiver and the
sub-receiver at the same time, you will be in one of
the following conditions. First, check where the “
”
and “
” icons are on the display, then follow the
instructions below.
SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER
First, confirm that the “
” icon is on the SUB band
display. If it is not, press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign
the function controls to the SUB band.
The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM
mode and receive in FM or AM mode. Press
[FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the operating mode for the
sub- receiver. The narrow bandwidth operation for
AM is not available for the SUB band frequency.
Refer to “NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM”
{page 29} for FM operation.
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the
sub-receiver. Refer to “FM CTCSS OPERATION”
{page 35} for function and control details.
FM DCS OPERATION
The “
” and “ ” icons are both on the MAIN band
display:
• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the subreceiver frequency.
You can assign an independent DCS code to the subreceiver. Refer to “FM DCS OPERATION” {page 36}
for function and control details.
“
” is on the SUB band display and “
” is on the
MAIN band display:
• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the subreceiver frequency.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
“
” is on the MAIN band display and “
” is on the
SUB band display:
• Turn the RIT/ SUB control, the MULTI/ CH control,
or the Tuning control to adjust the frequency. Or,
directly enter the frequency using the numeric
keypad {page 37}. However, the input frequency
must be within the sub-receiver frequency range.
The frequency you selected may round up to the
nearest workable frequency step size {page 37}.
You cannot transmit on the sub-band frequency.
46
This function scans through all the tone frequencies
in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on
the receiving signal of the sub-receiver. Refer to
“TONE FREQ. ID SCAN” {page 34} for function and
control details.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all the DCS codes in
order to identify the incoming DCS code on the
receiving signal of sub-receiver. Refer to “DCS
CODE ID SCAN” {page 36} for function and control
details.
10 SUB-RECEIVER
ATTENUATOR
TRANSMITTING
The attenuator reduces the level of received signals.
It is useful when there is strong interference from an
adjacent frequency. Since the main transceiver and
sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144
MHz and 430/ 440 MHz bands, activating the
attenuator function for the sub-receiver also causes
the function to switch ON for the same band of the
main transceiver.
First, confirm that the “ ” icon is on the SUB band
display. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT],
then speak into the microphone in your normal tone
of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND]
again or release Mic [PTT].
PRE-AMPLIFIER
The pre-amplifier amplifies the level of received
signals. It is useful when the receiving signal is weak.
If there is no strong interference from adjacent
frequencies, switch the pre-amplifier ON to raise the
receiving signal level. Since the main transceiver and
sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz
and 430/ 440 MHz bands, activating the pre-amplifier
function for the sub-receiver also causes the function
to switch ON for the same band of the main
transceiver.
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER
You can also adjust the output power for FM mode on
the 144 MHz and 430/ 440 MHz bands when you are
operating the sub-receiver.
1 Press [PWR].
• The current transmit power appears.
DUAL WATCH
If different frequency bands are set on the main
transceiver and sub-receiver, you can still monitor the
other band activities while transmitting on the TX
band. It is useful that you can still monitor the local
repeater frequency (VHF or UHF band) while you are
working on a DX station on the HF band of the main
transceiver.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the
power.
If you have the same frequency band (VHF or UHF
band) for the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you
can monitor both frequencies independently at the
same time. However, both receivers will temporarily
mute when you transmit because the transceiver
shares the same 144 MHz and 430/ 440 MHz band
antenna between the main transceiver and subreceiver.
Note:
◆ The selectable range varies depending on the band and mode
{page 79}.
◆ Output power configuration is also reflected in the main
transceiver.
SCAN
MICROPHONE GAIN
All types of scanning are also available for the subreceiver. However, the operating frequency range is
limited to the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage.
Refer to “SCAN” {page 66} for details on how to
operate the scan function.
Access Menu No. 41 and select “LOW”, “MID”, or
“HIGH” for the microphone gain.
NOISE REDUCTION
Since the sub-receiver can receive only in FM or AM
mode, DSP noise reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) is
available to reduce the noise from the receiving
signals. Refer to “NOISE REDUCTION” {page 56} for
details on how to control and adjust the function.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,
select “HIGH” microphone gain. Microphone sensitivity is low in FM
mode; this may cause insufficient modulation. For other
microphones, select “MID” or “LOW”.
FM REPEATER OPERATION
You can also configure an independent repeater
offset frequency for the sub-receiver, if necessary.
Refer to “FM REPEATER OPERATION” {page 32} for
details.
REVERSE FUNCTION
Press [TF-SET] to switch the sub-receiver Reverse
function ON (or OFF). “R” appears while the Reverse
function is active on the sub-receiver. Refer to
“REVERSE FUNCTION” {page 34} for details.
47
10 SUB-RECEIVER
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and
430/ 440 MHz bands of the sub-receiver. While using
a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the strength of
the uplink frequency to check the signals. Press and
hold [TF-SET] until “[R]” appears on the SUB band
display. Refer to “AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK”
{page 34} for function and control details.
TRANSMITTING A TONE
You can assign another Tone to the sub-receiver.
Refer to “TRANSMITTING A TONE” {page 33} for
function and control details.
MEMORY
You can also utilize all the memory functions
{page 58}, including the Quick Memory function
{page 64}, while you are operating the sub-receiver.
However, the operating frequency range is limited to
the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage. You cannot
recall any memory channels that are outside the subreceiver’s frequency coverage. These channels are
automatically skipped when they are recalled on the
sub-receiver.
48
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
PACKET RADIO
Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from
one computer to another, on a network. Packets can
be transmitted on radio waves as well as on
communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a
computer, all you need is a terminal node controller
(TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor
(MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to
convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa.
This transceiver has a built-in TNC which allows you
to use basic (not full) packet applications.
A variety of packet applications developed by hams
include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs).
PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers
called System Operators (SysOp). You may access
one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download
files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands
of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network,
relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the
world.
PBBS
Note:
◆ Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP)
serves as a communications interface in several digital modes
such as Packet, RTTY, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch
among the modes by sending a single command from your
computer.
◆ If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider becoming
a member. You can often learn more in an hour from
experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research.
Ask on the local repeaters, or contact your national amateur radio
organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local
amateur radio clubs. You’ll be glad you did.
BUILT-IN TNC
This transceiver has a built-in TNC which conforms to
the AX.25 protocol. Since the built-in TNC has been
designed to work with the Packet Cluster Tune
{page 53} and Sky Commander II+ {page 83}
functions, some of the enhanced TNC commands
may not be available. For the commands supported
by the built-in TNC, consult “BUILT-IN TNC
COMMAND LIST” starting on page 110. The AX-25
protocol is used for communication between TNCs.
The TNC accepts data from your personal computer
and assembles it into packets. It then converts those
packets to audio tones which the transceiver can
transmit. The TNC also takes audio tones from the
transceiver, converts them to data for the computer,
and checks for errors in the data.
In order to activate the built-in TNC, access Menu
No. 55 and select ON. The default is OFF. “PKT”
will appear to show that the built-in TNC is ON.
The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse
mode. First, you should learn the difference between
these two modes.
When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you
often need to register as a new user. After you are
successfully registered, it will then be available as
your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be
held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your
home PBBS.
To send e-mail, you must designate the address of a
recipient, using his or her call sign and the call sign of
his or her home PBBS; ex. KD6NUH@KJ6HC. In this
example, the e-mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose
home PBBS is KJ6HC. If your home PBBS cannot
find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail,
you must designate the address in more detail. You
may enter “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA”, or
“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA”, or up to
“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA.NA”, as
necessary. The complete address of a recipient living
in the U.S.A., for example, should include an
appropriate region code (preceded by a #), state,
country, and continent abbreviations, as above.
•
Command mode
When you select Packet mode, the TNC enters
Command mode. A “cmd:” prompt appears on the
computer screen. You can type commands from
the computer keyboard to change the settings of
the TNC. When in Converse mode, press
[Ctrl]+[C] on the keyboard to return to Command
mode.
•
Converse mode
The TNC enters this mode when a link with the
target station is established. On the computer
keyboard, type an appropriate command and a
message if necessary, then press [Enter] or
[Return]. What you type is converted into packets
and transmitted over the air. When in Command
mode, type CONVERSE, CONV, or K to enter
Converse mode.
Note: The built-in TNC automatically reinitiates when a malfunction
is detected; this does not designate that the transceiver is defective.
For further information, consult reference books
which should be available at any store that handles
Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to
Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search
engines, use “Packet Radio” as key words to find
those Web pages.
49
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
If you are using an external TNC or MCP, proceed
with the subsequent steps.
PREPARATION
1 Connect the transceiver to your personal
computer (via an external TNC or MCP if desired).
• See “COMPUTER” {page 93} and “MCP AND
TNC” {page 95}.
2 Install an appropriate terminal program onto the
personal computer.
• A variety of freeware and shareware programs
can be obtained in various ways. Consult your
reference material or other “packeteers”.
3 Initiate the terminal program and set the following
parameters on the personal computer:
• Transfer rate (TNC/MCP <–> Computer):
9600 bps (default setting)
• Data length: 8 bit
• Stop bit: 1 bit
• Parity: Non-parity
• Flow control: Hardware
4 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
5 Access Menu No. 46 and select the main band or
the sub-band (default) as the data band.
• “TNC” appears on the data band.
• If you are using an external TNC or MCP,
access Menu No. 50E to make this selection.
The default is main band.
6 Access Menu No. 47 and select 1200 bps (default)
or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs.
• You must select the same transfer rate as the
target station.
• If you are using an external TNC or MCP,
access Menu No. 50F to make this selection.
The default is 1200 bps.
11 Following the instructions provided with your TNC
or MCP, enter the calibration mode so that you
can generate a mark condition.
• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)
to red (TX).
12 Access Menu No. 50B to select the appropriate AF
input level.
• Select a proper input level, so that the ALC
meter reflects within the ALC zone.
13 Exit the calibration mode.
• The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to
green (RX).
14 Access Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate
AF output level.
• You cannot use the AF control to make this
adjustment.
• If you have selected sub-band in step 5,
access Menu No. 50D instead.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used
for Packet are listed below:
U.S.A./ Canada
ARU Region 1 (Europe/ Africa)
1800 ~ 1830
—
3620 ~ 3635
3590 ~ 3600
7080 ~ 7100
—
10140 ~ 10150
—
14095 ~ 14099.5
14089 ~ 14099, 14101 ~ 14112
18105 ~ 18110
—
21090 ~ 21100
21100 ~ 21120
7 Select an operating frequency.
28120 ~ 28189
28120 ~ 28150, 29200 ~ 29300
8 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to
select LSB, USB, or FM mode.
50600 ~ 50780
—
144910 ~ 145090
—
440975 ~ 441075
430050 ~ 431025
9 Access Menu No. 50A and select ON to activate
the DSP packet filter for the main transceiver.
10 Turn the HI/ SHIFT control to select the center
frequency of the packet mode. You can further
select either “NAR” (narrow) or “WID” (wide) for
the receiver filter width by turning the LO/ WIDTH
control.
Center Frequency
Operating Mode
1000 Hz
PSK31
1700 Hz
Packet (AFSK 1200 bps)
2210 Hz
Packet (AFSK 300 bps)
PSK
PSK
Note:
◆ The packet (9600 bps) operation is not affected by the DSP
packet filter settings.
◆ The DSP packet filter works only on the main transceiver.
50
DCD SENSE
You can also select the method for inhibiting the builtin TNC from transmitting. Access Menu No. 48 and
select one of the two methods. The default is “TNC
BAND”.
TNC BAND:
The TNC does not transmit when signals are present
on the TNC (data) band.
MAIN&SUB:
The TNC does not transmit when signals are present
on the main transceiver or sub-receiver.
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY)
RTTY is the data communications mode with the
longest history. It was originally designed for use with
mechanical teletypewriters which were often used
before personal computers became common. Now
you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal
computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you
type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you
typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer
screen of the recipient.
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)
and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to
transmit information.
For the cable connections, see “RTTY” {page 95}.
For further information, consult reference books
about Amateur Radio.
1 Access Menu No. 38 and select an FSK shift.
• FSK shift is the difference in frequencies
between a mark and a space.
• The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur
bands.
2 Access Menu No. 39 and select a key-down
polarity.
• Select “NORMAL” to transmit a mark when
keying down or “INVERS” to transmit a space.
The default is “NORMAL”.
3 Access Menu No. 40 and select high tone
(2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.
• High tone (default) is commonly used
nowadays.
4 Select an operating frequency.
5 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select FSK.
• “FSK” appears.
7 Following the instructions provided with your MCP,
enter a command from your computer to select
transmit mode.
• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)
to red (TX).
• You may instead press [SEND] to manually
select the transmit mode.
8 Begin sending data from your computer.
• Use Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF
output level. The AF control cannot be used
for this adjustment.
• Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor
your signals. Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI]
again to quit this function.
9 When finished transmitting, enter a command from
your computer to return to receive mode.
• The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to
green (RX).
• If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND]
again.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used
for RTTY operation are listed below:
U.S.A./ Canada
ARU Region 1
(Europe/ Africa)
1800 ~ 1840
1838 ~ 1842
3605 ~ 3645 (DX: 3590)
3580 ~ 3620
7080 ~ 7100 (DX: 7040)
7035 ~ 7045
10140 ~ 10150
10140 ~ 10150
14070 ~ 14099.5
14080 ~ 14099.5
18100 ~ 18110
18101 ~ 18109
21070 ~ 21100
21080 ~ 21120
24920 ~ 24930
22920 ~ 24929
28070 ~ 28150
28050 ~ 28150
Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press
[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With a key down
condition, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads in
the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit.
6 If necessary to be compatible with the other
station, press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse
the transceiver to the upper sideband.
• “FSR” appears.
•
•
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for
FSK operation.
Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to return to
the lower sideband.
51
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE
Besides Packet and RTTY, digital modes which have
been used among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR,
CLOVER, G-TOR, and PSK31. This manual does not
describe much about these modes. For details,
consult reference books about Amateur Radio.
Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application
for transmitting still images over the air, from one
station to another. Instead of trying to describe your
station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting
images over the air requires a scan converter,
besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms
images taken with a video camera into audio signals
that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient’s
scan converter transforms audio signals back into
video images so that he or she can view them on a
TV set.
AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has
brought amateur HF digital communication into the
computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode
by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are
transmitted.
PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has
combined the best features of both AMTOR and
Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital
communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR
sends error-free data using a handshaking method.
Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER
offers the best overall performance using a
complicated modulation technique, automatic power
adjustment and other advanced features. It may
allow communications to be maintained under the
worst conditions.
Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams
use a personal computer, a software application, and
an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much
cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set.
In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have
become available. You can transfer images from
these cameras into your computer.
For further information, consult reference books about
Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in kHz)
commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below:
G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is a
relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in
use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the
adverse conditions of communicating, across the
solar system, with spacecraft during their missions.
U.S.A./ Canada
ARU Region 1
(Europe/ Africa)
3845, 3857
3730 ~ 3740
7171
7035 ~ 7045
PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast,
G3PLX, in the Great Britain. The operating technique
is very similar to the conventional Baudot-RTTY,
although more sensitive fine-tuning is required, as a
PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few
Hertz. A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows the
entire ASCII character set, including the back space
character.
14230, 14233
14225 ~ 14235
21340
21335 ~ 21345
28680
28675 ~ 28685
145500
—
Your MCP should handle some or all of the above
modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult
the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable
connections, see “MCP AND TNC” {page 95}.
On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying
(AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of
modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or
USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is
used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR
which is normally operated in USB.
AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and
3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places
when searching for PacTOR, CLOVER, G-TOR, or
PSK31 stations.
Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast AGC
setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.
Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image
transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to
exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV.
Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax
systems. It scans paper and converts acquired
image data into a series of tones representing white
and black portions of the image. Because fax
requires longer transmission time, you should use it
only when band conditions are stable with strong
signals.
Popular fax frequencies include the following:
• 7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and
28945 kHz
Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning
the functionality of your computer application or
accessory hardware that supports these modes.
Consult the instruction manual that comes with your
software or accessory equipment.
Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting
and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.
52
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE
SATELLITE OPERATION
DX Packet Cluster is a packet network which consist
of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing
and contesting. If one station finds a DX station on
the air, he or she sends a notice to his or her node.
This node then passes the information to all its local
stations as well as another node. This transceiver
can display received DX information and hold the
latest information on up to 10 DX stations.
Amateur satellites receive on one band and transmit
on another. Unlike in regular operation, Satellite
mode can handle uplink/ downlink frequency
combinations simultaneously in all operating modes
as shown below.
This transceiver is also capable of automatically
tuning in a reported DX station. In order to use the
Auto Tune function, access Menu No. 49A and select
“AUTO”; the default is “MANUAL”.
UPLINK
Band
HF ~
50 MHz
HF ~
50 MHz
DOWN
LINK
144 MHz
430/
440 MHz
1.2 GHz
√
√
√
√
√
144 MHz
√
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
430/
440 MHz
√
√
2 Press the SUB AF control to activate the subreceiver if it is switched OFF.
1.2 GHz
√
√
•
The orange SUB LED lights {page 45}.
3 Tune to the frequency of the target DX Packet
Cluster node on the sub-receiver.
4 Access Menu No. 46 to confirm that “SUB” is
selected.
5 Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to enter the Packet
Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) mode.
• Each time new DX Packet Cluster data is
received, the DX station’s callsign in Morse
code sounds and the information is displayed
on the sub-receiver as shown below:
6 If you are not using the Auto Tune function, press
[SET/ P.C.T.].
• The main transceiver is tuned to the frequency
of the reported DX station, on the sub-receiver.
• Transmitting on the tuned frequency, the
transceiver exits the P.C.T. mode. Press
[FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] again to reactivate it if
necessary.
7 Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to exit the P.C.T.
mode.
To access desired DX information in the P.C.T
memory, press QUICK MEMO [MR], then turn the
MULTI/ CH control. Press [SET/ P.C.T.] to tune the
main band to the selected station. Press QUICK
MEMO [MR] again to quit the DX information display.
The transceiver can be set to output a beep instead
of a Morse code when new DX Packet Cluster data is
received. Access Menu No. 49B and select “OFF”.
“VOICE” can also be set when you install the optional
VS-3 {page 91}.
Note:
◆ You cannot send DX information to a node using this function.
◆ The DX Packet Cluster data in memory is retained when the
transceiver is turned OFF. However, the sub-receiver’s
frequency display returns to the receiving frequency of the DX
Packet Cluster node.
√
√
Some satellites require a rotator that allows azimuth
and elevation control, plus a high-gain directional
antenna. The antenna must track the satellite which
travels from horizon to horizon. Even so, many hams
have been successfully using fixed omnidirectional
antennas. If you are using a directional antenna, it
would be wise to obtain a pass prediction program.
Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take
into account when working the satellites. As a target
satellite travels away, frequencies on which you will
receive change. This transceiver has a function that
automatically keeps the sum or difference between
the two frequencies identical when you change the
receive frequency.
For further information, consult Internet Web pages
relating to Amateur satellites. On Internet search
engines, use “AMSAT” as key words to find those
Web pages. Or, you can directly go to the AMSAT
(the Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation) homepage
at http://www.amsat.org. From AMSAT Web pages,
you can download a variety of utilities, including pass
prediction programs, which will ease your satellite
operations.
BASIC OPERATION
When you enter the Satellite mode, you are always
controlling one of 10 Satellite Memory channels with
the adjustable frequency function. The Satellite
Memory channel number (0 ~ 9) appears on the main
transceiver’s display when you enter the mode.
1 Press [SATL] to enter Satellite mode.
• The default downlink (435.9 MHz) and uplink
(145.9 MHz) frequencies appear.
•
“TRACE”, “ ”, and “
current selections.
” appear to indicate the
2 On VFO A, tune to the downlink (RX) frequency of
the satellite.
53
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
3 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [CW/ FSK/ REV] to
select LSB, USB, or CW mode.
4 As the Satellite moves, fine tune to the changing
downlink (RX) frequency of the satellite using the
Tuning control (adjusting the Doppler effect).
• As you adjust the downlink (RX) frequency, the
Trace function automatically changes the uplink
frequency so that the sum of the two
frequencies is kept the same (Reverse Trace).
• If necessary, press [A=B / TRACE] to quit the
Trace function. “TRACE” disappears.
• The trace function can also change the uplink
(TX) frequency so that the difference between
the two frequencies is kept the same (Normal
Trace).
5 If you want to switch to the normal trace mode,
press [SPLIT / REV]. “ ” disappears.
6 To adjust the frequency on the sub-band display
(normally the uplink frequency) without tracing,
turn the RIT/ SUB control. To adjust it using the
trace function, press [A/B / M/S] to swap the main
band frequency and sub-band frequency then turn
the Tuning control or MULTI/ CH control. The
following table shows which control to use when
adjusting frequencies with tracing ON and OFF.
TRACE/
TRACE R ON
Tuning control
Main and Sub
(Normal)
MULTI/ CH
Main and Sub
control (Coarse)
RIT/ SUB
Sub
control
TRACE/
TRACE R OFF
Main
Main
You can name each Satellite Memory channel using a
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters. First, store
the settings to the Satellite Memory channel {above}.
To store the Satellite Channel name:
1 Press [M.IN] then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the Satellite Memory channel.
2 Press [DISP].
3 An entry cursor appears. Select a character by
turning MULTI/ CH control, then move the cursor
using [SUB] or [MAIN]. You can also use the
other methods to enter the characters. Refer to
page 63 for details.
4 Press [M.IN] to store the name to the Satellite
Memory channel. Press [CLR] to quit.
5 The stored Satellite Memory name appears on the
main dot-matrix display.
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE
While in the Satellite mode, only 1 Quick Memory
channel is available. It uses Satellite Memory
channel 9 to store the settings. To store the settings
to the Quick Memory in Satellite mode, press
QUICK MEMO [M.IN]. The settings are stored to
Satellite Memory channel 9.
To recall the Quick Memory, press
QUICK MEMO [MR] or select Satellite Memory
channel 9, using the MULTI/ CH control. Satellite
Memory channel 9 is recalled.
Sub
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS
You can store all the above settings to one of 10
Satellite memory channels for the future operations.
1 Press [M.IN], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select a channel from 0 to 9.
2 Select your desired settings.
3 Press [M.IN] again to store the selection to the
memory channel. To quit, press [CLR].
Note: The Satellite Memory channel does not hold the frequency
adjustment values when the channel is changed. So, when you
change the channel number or switch the transceiver OFF, the
adjustment frequency values are cleared if they are not stored by
pressing [M.IN].
RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL
1 Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH].
• The MULTI/ CH LED lights.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Satellite Memory channel.
3 Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH] to return to the
frequency adjustment mode.
54
SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY
When you need to monitor the uplink (TX) frequency,
press [TF-SET]. Each time you press [TF-SET], the
uplink (TX) frequency and the downlink (RX)
frequency are swapped.
USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE
You can also use the RIT or XIT function while in the
Satellite mode. Press [RIT/ CW TUNE] or [XIT/ ALT]
to activate the function. When the RIT or XIT function
is ON, the sub-band frequency display shows the
current RIT or XIT offset frequency instead of the
operating frequency. To clear the RIT or XIT offset
frequency, press [CLEAR].
Note: You cannot activate both the RIT and XIT functions at the
same time in the Satellite mode.
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND
If you need to change the uplink and/or downlink
frequency band, press [CTRL] to move the “
” icon
to the frequency band that you want to change.
Then, press [+]/ [–] to select the band you want to
operate.
REJECTING INTERFERENCE
DSP FILTERS
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)
technology is used for the functions described in this
section. Using DSP filtering, the TS-2000 frees you
from installing many analog filters for each operating
mode. Additionally, you can control the bandwidth,
cancel the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the
noise level using DSP filtering technology.
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH
For improving interference reduction capability, this
transceiver also provides IF filters designed using
DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode,
you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low
and/or high cut-off frequency. For CW and FSK
modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by
directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter
bandwidth does not affect the current receive
frequency.
Note:
◆ The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on the main
transceiver.
◆ The IF DSP filter is not available in FM mode.
■ SSB/ FM/ AM Modes
SSB/ FM
Default low-cut
frequecy (Hz)
300
Default high-cut
frequency (Hz)
2600
AM
100
5000
Mode
4 To return the display to the current operating
mode, press [DISP].
Note:
◆ The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted independently for
each operating mode. When you change the operating
mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating
mode.
◆ When the Packet filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON, you cannot
change the DSP filter bandwidth. Switch the Packet filter
OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.
■ CW/ FSK Modes
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW or FSK
mode.
2 Press [DISP].
• The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to
increase (wide) the bandwidth, or
counterclockwise to decrease (narrow) the
bandwidth.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Press [DISP].
• The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to raise
the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise
to lower the low cut-off frequency.
LO/ WIDTH
Interfering
signal
f
Mode
f
Turn the HI/ SHIFT control clockwise to raise
the high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise
to lower the high cut-off frequency.
HI/ SHIFT
f
Desired
signal
Interfering
signal
Bandwidth Selections (Hz)
50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400,
500, 600, 1000, 2000
FSK 250, 500, 1000, 1500
CW
Default
(Hz)
600
1500
4 As for CW, you can further adjust the shift
frequency for passband. Turn the HI/ SHIFT
control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to
1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The default shift
frequency is 800 Hz.
5 To return the display to the current operating
mode, press [DISP].
f
Adjust
Frequency Selections (Hz)
LO/ WIDTH
0, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400,
500, 600, 700, 800, 900,
1000
HI/ SHIFT
1400, 1600, 1800, 2000,
2200, 2400, 2600, 2800,
3000, 3400, 4000, 5000
55
12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
NOTCH FILTER (SSB)
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (ALL MODES)
Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates
any single interfering tone within the receive pass
band. This function operates digitally at the IF filter
level, hence it can affect your S-meter reading and
may also affect (slightly attenuate) your desired
signal. However, controlling the AGC level by
notching out the strong interfering beat signals could
bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the
interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,
you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more
effectively.
Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL], then turn the
MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat Cancel
frequency manually. You can select the beat cancel
frequency from approx. 300Hz to 3000 Hz by turning
the control. Turn the control clockwise to select a
higher frequency and counterclockwise to select a
lower frequency.
Receive pass band
Interfering
tones
Note: While adjusting the MANUAL BC control, the transceiver
clicks. This is not a malfunction.
Desired
signal
Before
After
Press [A.N./ LEVEL] to toggle the Auto Notch Filter
ON and OFF.
• “A.N.” appears when the function is ON.
• The interfering beat signals are notched out.
If the interfering beat signals change the tone
frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch
level.
Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to access the Auto
Notch level adjustment, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select the level from FIX, and 1 to 4.
Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking speed and
Level 4 is the fastest. FIX terminates the beat tone
tracking. Adjust this pamameter manually to remove
the beat signal if necessary.
AUTO BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)
Auto Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and
attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the
receive pass band. The adaptive filter changes its
characteristics according to the nature of the signal
being received at any given moment. You can use
automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB or AM mode.
Receive pass band
Interfering
tones
Desired
signal
Before
After
Press [B.C./ MANUAL] to toggle between the Auto
Beat Cancel ON and OFF.
• “B. C.” appears when the function is ON.
• If desired, you can manually control the beat
cancel frequency.
56
Since the DSP Beat Cancel processes the incoming
signals at the AF stage, strong beat signals may
control the AGC, then weaken the target signal level.
In this case, use the Auto Notch Filter instead, to
remove the beat signal from the IF passband filter.
NOISE REDUCTION
(N.R. 1: ALL MODES, N.R. 2: SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM)
This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction
functions (1 and 2) for reducing random noise which
interferes with the desired signal. Trying them both is
the easiest way to judge which function works more
effectively under the current conditions. Normally,
select Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) in SSB
mode and Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC) in CW mode.
Press [N.R./ LEVEL] to toggle between Noise
Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.
•
” or “
” appears, depending on which
“
function is selected.
■ Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment
The Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced Method)
uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element
from the received signals. When the S/N ratio is
reasonably good in SSB, using N.R. 1 will improve
the S/N further.
While N.R. 1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise
reduction level by pressing [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL],
then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the level
from 1 to 9 or AUTO. The default is AUTO.
■ Setting the N.R. 2 Time Constant
You can change the correlation time for Noise
Reduction 2 (SPAC). When in SSB mode, select
the correlation time that allows you to hear signals
with more clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to
select the longest correlation time that allows
reliable reception. The longer the correlation time,
the better the S/N ratio.
When N.R. 2 is ON, press [FUNC],
[N.R./ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms.
The default is 20 ms.
Note:
◆ Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity of
signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the conditions.
◆ Only Noise Reduction 1 is available for the sub-receiver.
However, the level cannot be adjusted.
12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
NOISE BLANKER
ATTENUATOR
Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise
such as that generated by automobile ignitions.
Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.
The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals.
This function is useful when there is strong
interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [7/ NB/ LEVEL] to toggle between the Noise
Blanker ON and OFF.
• “NB” appears when the function is ON.
Press [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle the Attenuator ON
and OFF.
• “ATT” appears when the function is ON.
You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from
1 to 10. The default level is 6.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in
the current band. Each time you select the same
frequency band, the attenuator setting will be
automatically recalled.
Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/ LEVEL], then turn the
MULTI/ CH control to adjust the noise blanker level.
• “NB LEVEL” and the current level appear on the
sub dot-matrix display.
Note: Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver in
SSB, CW, FSK, and AM modes.
PRE-AMPLIFIER
Switching the Pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce
interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle between the
Pre-amplifier ON and OFF.
• “PRE” appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in
the current band. Each time you select the same
band, the same setting will be automatically selected.
The frequency range of each band is provided in the
following table (under “ATTENUATOR”).
Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band is
selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the
pre-amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This
is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same
antenna.
The frequency range of each band is shown below.
Frequency Bands
(MHz)
0.03 ~ 2.5
Pre-amplifier
(Default)
OFF
Attenuator
(Default)
OFF
2.5 ~ 4.1
OFF
OFF
4.1 ~ 7.5
OFF
OFF
7.5 ~ 10.5
ON
OFF
10.5 ~ 14.5
ON
OFF
14.5 ~ 18.5
ON
OFF
18.5 ~ 21.5
ON
OFF
21.5 ~ 25.5
ON
OFF
25.5 ~ 30.0
ON
OFF
30.0 ~ 60.0
ON
OFF
118 ~ 300
ON
OFF
300 ~ 512
ON
OFF
1240 ~ 1300
Always ON
Always OFF
Note:
◆ If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430/ 440 MHz) band is
selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the
attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This is
because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same
antenna.
◆ Available receiving frequencies in the above frequency bands
vary, depending on the market code. Refer to the Specifications
{page 106} for details.
◆ If 118 ~ 135.995 MHz, 155 ~ 173.995 MHz or 220 ~ 229.995 MHz
is selected for the sub-receiver, the pre-amplifier cannot be turned
ON (K-type only).
57
MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY CHANNELS
STORING DATA IN MEMORY
The TS-2000(X) provides you with 300 memory
channels, numbered 00 to 299, for storing operating
frequency data, modes and other information.
Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional
Memory Channels. Memory channels 290 to 299 are
designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and
scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below:
There are 2 methods used for storing transmit/receive
frequencies and associated data in memory channels
00 to 289. Use either method, depending on the
relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies
you store:
•
Simplex channels:
RX frequency = TX frequency
Conventional memory is used for storing data you
will often recall. For example, you may store the
frequency where you regularly meet your club
members.
•
Split-frequency channels:
RX frequency ≠ TX frequency
RX frequency
Channel
00 ~ 289
Yes
TX frequency
Yes
RX mode
Yes
TX mode
Parameter
1
Channel
290 ~ 299
Yes 1
(simplex)
Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as
simplex channels.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT or
XIT offset will be stored.
■ Simplex Channels
Yes
Yes 1
(simplex)
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO
is selected.
Start/ End frequencies
No
Yes
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
Offset frequency
Yes
Yes
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
Shift direction
Yes
Yes
Reverse mode
Yes
Yes
RX frequency step size
Yes
TX frequency step size
Yes
Yes
(simplex)
Tone frequency
Yes
Yes
CTCSS frequency
Yes
Yes
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS mode
ON/ OFF
Memory name
Memory Channel Lockout
ON/ OFF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys.
Yes 1
Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the
contents of the channel.
58
•
5 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
13 MEMORY FEATURES
■ Split-Frequency Channels
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO
is selected.
There are two modes which allow you to retrieve
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
• This frequency and mode will be used for
transmitting.
Memory Recall:
In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits
using a frequency that you retrieve. You can
temporarily change the frequency and associated
data without overwriting the contents of the memory
channel when Menu No. 06B is set to ON.
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4 Select the receive frequency and mode.
5 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
Memory Scroll:
Use this mode to check the contents of the memory
channels without changing the current receive
frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are
not used for receiving and transmitting.
■ Memory Recall
6 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
•
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
• The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
7 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys.
8 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• Continuously holding down Mic [UP]/
[DWN] steps the transceiver through the
memory channels until the key is released.
• Memory channels which contain no data are
skipped.
• You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M].
Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX
while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone
frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.
59
13 MEMORY FEATURES
■ Memory Scroll
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to step through the memory channels.
• You can also change channels by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys, then pressing [ENT].
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
• The transceiver re-displays the memory
channel or VFO frequency that was
selected before you activated Memory
Scroll.
Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll
mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the current VFO
data to the memory channel you selected.
■ Temporary Frequency Changes
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change
the data without overwriting the contents of the
memory channel.
1 Access Menu No. 06B and select ON.
• Skip this step when changing only the
associated data (not the frequency).
2 Recall a memory channel.
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.
• Use only the Tuning control to select a
frequency.
4 If necessary for future use, store the changed
data in another memory channel. Refer to
“Channel ➡ Channel Transfer” {page 61}.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION
Under “ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS” {page 31},
you learned about split-frequency operation using two
VFOs. Recalling a split-frequency channel is another
way to perform split-frequency operation. If you
access Menu No. 06A and select ON, you can also
use a memory channel and a VFO together for this
operation, as follows:
•
RX: Memory channel
TX: VFO A or VFO B
•
RX: VFO A or VFO B
TX: Memory channel
To use a memory channel for receiving:
1 Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.
2 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for
transmitting.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
3 Select the frequency for transmitting.
4 Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M].
5 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory
channel to receive.
6 Press [SPLIT].
7 The VFO A frequency appears on the sub-display.
If you want to use the VFO B frequency to
transmit, press [SPLIT] again.
8 Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency shown on the sub display.
9 Press [SPLIT] to exit the SPLIT operation.
• If Split operation is still selected using VFO A or
VFO B, press [SPLIT] again to exit Split
operation.
To use a memory channel for transmitting:
1 Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.
2 Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M].
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory
channel to transmit.
4 Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.
5 Press [SPLIT]. The other VFO frequency appears
on the sub display for transmission (Normal SPLIT
operation).
6 Press [SPLIT] again. The memory channel you
selected in step 3 appears on the sub-display for
transmission.
7 Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency in the memory channel.
8 Press [SPLIT] to exit SPLIT operation.
60
13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY TRANSFER
■ Memory \ VFO Transfer
After retrieving frequencies and associated data
from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data
to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,
when the frequency you want to monitor is near
the frequency stored in a memory channel.
1 Recall the desired memory channel.
sVFO/ MG.SEL].
2 Press [Ms
• When a simplex channel is recalled, the
data is copied to VFO A or VFO B,
depending on which VFO was used to recall
the channel.
• When a split channel is recalled, the RX
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is
copied to VFO B.
Note:
◆ The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone
frequency are not copied.
◆ Pressing [MsVFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the
retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.
■ Channel \ Channel Transfer
You can also copy channel information from one
memory channel to another. This function is
useful when storing frequencies and associated
data that you temporarily change in Memory
Recall mode.
Channel 00 ~ 289
a
Channel 290 ~ 299
RX frequency
a
TX frequency
a
TX/ RX frequency
(simplex)
Mode for RX
a
Mode for TX
a
Mode for TX/ RX
(simplex)
Offset frequency
a
Offset frequency
Shift direction
a
Shift direction
Reverse ON/ OFF
a
Reverse ON/ OFF
RX frequency step
a
TX frequency step
a
TX/ RX frequency
step (simplex)
Tone frequency
a
Tone frequency
CTCSS frequency
a
CTCSS frequency
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/ OFF
a
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
a
Channel 00 ~ 289
a
RX frequency
a
TX frequency
a
Mode for RX
a
Mode for TX
Offset frequency
a
Offset frequency
Shift direction
a
Shift direction
Reverse ON/ OFF
a
Reverse ON/ OFF
TX/ RX frequency
step (simplex)
a
RX frequency step
a
TX frequency step
TX/ RX frequency
2 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
Mode for TX/ RX
4 Press [M.IN] again.
a
a
Channel 290 ~ 299
1 Recall the desired memory channel {page 59}.
3 Select the memory channel where you would
like the data copied, using the MULTI/ CH
control.
a
Channel 00 ~ 289
a
Channel 00 ~ 289
RX frequency
a
RX frequency
TX frequency
a
TX frequency
Tone frequency
a
Tone frequency
Mode for RX
a
Mode for RX
CTCSS frequency
a
CTCSS frequency
Mode for TX
a
Mode for TX
a
Offset frequency
a
Offset frequency
Shift direction
a
Shift direction
Reverse ON/ OFF
a
Reverse ON/ OFF
RX frequency step
a
RX frequency step
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/ OFF
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
TX frequency step
a
TX frequency step
Tone frequency
a
Tone frequency
CTCSS frequency
a
CTCSS frequency
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/ OFF
a
DCS code
Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
ON/ OFF
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
a
a
a
a
a
a
When copying a memory channel 290 ~ 299 a
channel 290 ~ 299, Memory Channel Lockout
status changes to OFF, regardless of the original
channel settings.
The tables above illustrate how data is transferred
between memory channels.
61
13 MEMORY FEATURES
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store
frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.
Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To
tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,
store the start and end frequencies for that range in
advance.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN] to select a memory channel from
290 to 299.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
2 Select the desired start frequency.
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
Now you can only tune from the start frequency to
the end frequency, using the Tuning control.
Note: Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/ CH
control results changing the memory channel number while in
Programmable VFO mode.
Memory Channel Lockout
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer
not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is
described in the next chapter {page 68}.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of
290 to 299.
• You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 290, using the
numeric keys.
5 Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the
memory channel.
• “CLOSE INPUT” appears on the sub dot-matrix
display.
6 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control
to select the end frequency.
7 Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the
memory channel.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
■ Confirming Start/End Frequencies
Use this procedure to check the start and end
frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN] to select a memory channel from
290 to 299.
3 Press [–] to check the start frequency and [+]
to check the end frequency.
■ Programmable VFO
Using the start and end frequencies that you
stored in channels 290 to 299, Programmable
VFO restricts the frequency range that you can
tune with the Tuning control. One application of
this function is to help you operate within the
authorized frequency limits of your license.
62
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
3 Press [CLR] momentarily.
• Pressing [CLR] for more than approximately
2 seconds erases the contents of the
memory channel.
• A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the
memory channel number to indicate the
channel has been locked out.
•
Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between
adding and removing the channel from the
scan list.
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS
If there are memory channels that you will not recall
in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of
those channels.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
• You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric
keys.
3 Press and hold [CLR] for approximately two
seconds.
• A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel
data has been erased.
13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME
Alpha-numeric characters
You can assign a name to each memory channel. A
maximum of 7 alpha-numeric characters can be
stored.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
–
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
Ç
È
É
Ñ
Ò
Note: Alpha-numeric entries are limited to those characters
shown in the following DTMF character table when you are using
a DTMF Mic.
5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the
memory channel name, press [M.IN] to store the
name, or press [DISP] to select a Memory Group.
You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9).
Enter the desired group number by pressing a
numeric key. The selected group is shown in a
larger font. After selecting a group, press [M.IN]
to store the name and group number in the
memory channel.
6 When you recall a memory channel with a name,
the name is displayed on the dot-matrix display
along with the memory channel number and group
number {page 64}.
Additional characters for all E-types
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Ô
Õ
Ö
s
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ó
Y´
S
ß
Œ
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
œ
ø
ù
û
ü
y´
Ÿ
ÿ
ˆ
4 Press [+]/ [–] or turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the desired alpha-numeric character. You
can move the cursor to the left by pressing
[MAIN], or to the right by pressing [SUB]. Or, you
can use an optional DTMF microphone to enter
alpha-numeric characters.
ˆ
3 Press [DISP].
Available characters
Æ
ú
Available characters using a DTMF Mic
DTMF
key
1
q
z
1
Q
Z
2
a
b
c
2
A
B
C
3
d
e
f
3
D
E
F
4
g
h
i
4
G
H
I
5
j
k
l
5
J
K
L
6
m
n
o
6
M
N
O
7
p
r
s
7
P
R
S
8
t
u
v
8
T
U
V
9
w
x
y
9
W
X
Y
0
space
0
#
?
&
:
!
#
"
–
>
/
;
*
'
.
,
(
)
<
@
No function
A
Move the cursor right
B
Move the cursor left
C
Delete the selected character
D
Same as [M.IN] key
Available characters
63
13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY GROUP
QUICK MEMORY
To manage 300 memory channels, you can divide
them up into a maximum of 10 groups (Groups 0 to 9).
After you configure a Memory Group, you can select
one or more of the Memory Groups you want to recall,
in Memory Recall mode. As a default, all memory
channels are stored in Group 0.
Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily
save data without specifying a particular memory
channel. Use Quick memory to store data you will
not use in future operating sessions. For example, as
you tune across the band looking for DX, it is
convenient to store stations that you want to contact.
You can quickly jump between several different
memory channels as you monitor them.
To change the Memory Channel Group:
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
2 Select the desired memory channel for which you
want to change the Memory Group by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
3 Press [DISP].
• The Memory Name input prompt appears.
4 Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a
Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN] or [SUB]
{page 63}.
• The current Memory Group appears in a larger
font.
5 Press a numeric key to change the selected
Group number. The newly selected Group
number appears in a larger font.
6 Press [M.IN] to store the settings.
■ Memory Group Select
After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory
Channels, you can select one or more of the Groups
to be recalled in Memory Recall mode.
To select Memory Groups:
sVFO/ MG.SEL] to enter
1 Press [FUNC], [Ms
Memory Group Select mode.
2 Numbers 0 ~ 9 appear in the main dot-matrix
display. The selected Memory Group numbers are
displayed in larger fonts. To change the selection,
press a numeric key. To select all the Memory
Groups, press [•/ DCS/SEL]. At least, one
Memory Group must be selected.
This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels
(“0_” to “9_”) that can store the following data:
VFO A frequency and
operating mode
Sub-receiver ON/ OFF
VFO B frequency and
operating mode
Sub-receiver frequency
and operating mode
RIT ON/ OFF
XIT ON/ OFF
RIT/ XIT offset frequency Receiver filter bandwidth
Noise Blanker ON/ OFF
FINE ON/ OFF
DSP Noise Reduction
OFF/ 1/ 2
DSP Auto Notch
ON/ OFF
DSP Beat Cancel
ON/ OFF
TX/ RX functions
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously
stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective
Quick memory channel. When all ten memory
channels contain frequencies, storing one more
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9
off the stack (the data is lost).
The following diagram illustrates how the Quick
Memory stacks the data in memory each time you
press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
New data
24.911
144.005
14.235
441.250
18.111
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
50.015
7.082
29.610
3.545
145.250
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Memory 8
Memory 9
New data
3 Press [M.IN] to save the setting and exit.
4 You can now recall only the selected Memory
Groups in Memory Recall mode.
21.005
24.911
144.005
14.235
441.250
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
18.111
50.015
7.082
29.610
3.545
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Memory 8
Memory 9
New data
14.085
21.005
24.911
144.005
14.235
Memory 0
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
441.250
18.111
50.015
7.082
29.610
Memory 5
Memory 6
Memory 7
Memory 8
Memory 9
Note: To use the Quick memory channels, you must operate both
the main transceiver and the sub-receiver in VFO mode. If you are
using the Quick memory channels while the sub-receiver is turned
off, its last operating mode must be VFO mode. Turning the
sub-receiver off while it is recalling a memory channel will not allow
you to use the Quick memory function.
64
13 MEMORY FEATURES
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when
you operate both the main transceiver and the
sub-receiver in VFO mode.
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the main
transceiver or sub-receiver VFO.
2 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• Each time QUICK MEMO [M.IN] is pressed,
the current VFO data is written to the Quick
Memory.
QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER
This function copies the contents of the recalled
memory channel to the VFO.
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel.
sVFO/ MG.SEL].
2 Press [Ms
Note: Pressing [MsVFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the
recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset will
also be stored.
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when
you operate both the main transceiver and the
sub-receiver in VFO mode.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
• The current memory channel number appears.
•
If there is no data stored in any Quick memory
channel, the data cannot be recalled to the
current VFO, an error beep sounds.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
• You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES
After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can
temporarily change the data without overwriting the
contents of the channel. You can change the
frequency even when you select OFF in Menu
No. 06B.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.
4 To store the changed data in the Quick memory,
press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• This action stores the new data in the current
channel and bumps the old frequency to the
next higher Quick memory channel.
5 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
65
SCAN
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable
with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating
efficiency.
This transceiver provides the following types of scans.
Scan Type
Purpose
Scans the entire band of the
frequency you selected
Scans the specific frequency
Normal
Program
ranges stored in Memory
Scan
Scan
channels 290 ~ 299
Scans the frequencies within
MHz Scan
a 1 MHz range
All-Channel Scans all Memory channels,
Scan
from 00 to 299
Memory
Scan
Scans the specific Memory
Group Scan
channel groups
Scans the Call channel and
VFO
the current VFO frequency
Call
Scan
Memory Scans the Call channel and
Channel the selected Memory channel
Scans the current operating
frequency as well as a
specified number of
VFO
frequencies above and below
that frequency. The signal
Visual
strength of each channel is
Scan*
displayed in a bar-graph
Scans the Memory channels
Memory and displays the signal
Channel strength of each channel in a
bar-graph
VFO Scan
* Visual Scan graphically shows how frequencies in a specific range
are busy.
Note:
While using CTCSS or DCS, Scan stops only for the signals that
contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected.
◆ When using S-meter Squelch, Scan stops when the received
signal strength matches or exceeds the S-meter setting. Scan
resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the S-meter
setting.
◆ Pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop if it is
functioning on a non TX band. Pressing Mic [PTT] on the
scanning band causes Scan to stop.
◆ Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker.
•
Program Scan
By programming the start and end frequency in
Memory channels 290 ~ 299 {page 62}, you can
limit the scanning frequency range. Since there
are 10 memory channels (290 ~ 299) available for
specifying the start and end frequency, you can
select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to
scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX
station on a certain frequency but the station may
appear on slightly higher or lower frequency.
VFOSCAN
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is
available for the current VFO. When the Program
Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan
Group is selected for the Program Scan, the
transceiver also scans the entire frequency range
available for the current VFO.
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are
programmed in memory channels 290 to 299:
1 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].
2 If one or more memory channels are selected for
the Program Scan, the selected channels are
displayed in a larger font on the main dot-matrix
display.
In this case, press [•/ DCS/SEL] to temporarily
deselect all the channels. When there are no Scan
Group channels selected, “VFO SCN MODE”
appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
◆
NORMAL SCAN
When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode,
2 types of scanning are available.
•
VFO Scan
The transceiver scans the entire band of the
frequency you selected. For example, if you are
operating and receiving on the main transceiver’s
VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the
frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to
60.00000 MHz. (Refer to VFO frequency range
in the Specifications.)
66
3 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to the current
VFO mode.
4 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.
Note:
◆ While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning the
RIT/ SUB control. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise
to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator
appears on the main dot-matrix display, where P1 is the fastest
speed and P9 is the slowest.
◆ You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.
◆ You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub-receiver.
14 SCAN
PROGRAMSCAN
Program Scan monitors the range between the start
and end frequencies that you have stored in
Conventional memory channels 290 to 299. Refer to
“STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 62} for
details on how to store the start and end frequencies.
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels
(Memory channels 290 to 299) and sequentially scan
the ranges that you stored in these channels. Program
Scan starts with the smallest channel number and
repeats the sequence as described below.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• If you are operating the sub-receiver, press
[VFO/M] to select VFO mode.
2 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].
3 If no Program scan channel is selected, all memory
channel numbers (from 290 to 299) are displayed in
small fonts. Only the one’s digit of each memory
channel is displayed on the main dot-matrix display.
0 represents channel 290, 1 represents channel 291,
2 represents channel 292, etc.
4 To select the Program scan frequency range,
press a numeric key 0 to 9. For example, press
[3] for channel 293 only or press [3], [5], [7] to
select channels 293, 295, and 297. When a
channel is selected for the Program Scan, the
number is displayed in a larger font.
To temporarily deselect all the channels (290 to 299)
so that you can perform the VFO Scan, press
[•/ DCS/SEL] (Refer to “VFO SCAN” on page 66).
Note:
◆ At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from 290 to 299)
must be programmed and selected to perform the Program Scan.
If no Program channel is selected or available for the Program
Scan, the transceiver performs the VFO Scan.
◆ When performing the Program Scan on the sub-receiver, the
frequencies must be within the sub-receiver frequency range
limitations. Otherwise, the Program Scan cannot be performed.
The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.
•
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops
on a frequency where a signal is present. The
transceiver will either remain on that channel
for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until
the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode),
depending on which mode you select via Menu
No. 10 {page 68}.
6 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].
Note:
◆ If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Program
Scan, the sub-receiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be scanned on the sub-receiver. The same
conditions also apply to the main transceiver.
◆ If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM mode, Scan may
fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this
happens, turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control slightly
counterclockwise.
◆ If you press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] before storing any frequency range
for memory channels 290 to 299, the transceiver starts VFO
scan.
◆ When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges
that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the
current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory
channel is used.
◆ When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that
you selected with the channel numbers, Scan starts with the start
frequency stored in the smallest channel number.
◆ The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the
memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.
◆ When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the
MULTI/ CH control, turning the control clockwise causes Scan to
jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end
frequency.
◆ Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
◆ While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 04 setting.
◆ You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
PROGRAMSCANPARTIALLYSLOWED
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for
each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the
Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To
specify the slow down frequency points, first program
the start and end frequencies into a memory channel
(290 ~ 299) {page 62}.
1 Access Menu No. 07 to confirm that the function is
ON (default is ON).
2 You can further configure the slow down frequency
width. Access Menu No. 08 to select the range
from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program
Scan.
• To quickly move towards a desired frequency
while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the
MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
• When in a mode other than FM mode, turning
the RIT/ SUB control clockwise decreases the
scan speed, and counterclockwise increases
the speed. The current scan speed is shown
on the display; P1 is the fastest speed and P9
is the slowest.
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 08, the
Program Scan slows down to a ±500 Hz width, centering the
frequency you marked below.
3 Press [VFO/M] to recall the memory channel
(290 ~ 299) for which you want to specify the
scan slow down frequencies.
4 Press [–]/ [+] to confirm the start ([–]) or end ([+])
frequency.
5 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency
point that you want the Program Scan to slow
down. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to mark the
Slow down frequency point. The “ ” icon appears.
67
14 SCAN
6 Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down
frequency points. You can specify a maximum of
5 frequency points for each channel.
7 If you want to clear the slow down frequency
points that you previously stored, press and hold
QUICK MEMO [M.IN] for 1 second.
A confirmation beep sounds and the transceiver
clears all the slow down frequency points you
specified in the memory channel.
Note: You must clear all the previous slow down frequency
points; you cannot clear only specific points.
8 Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.
9 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan
with the slow down frequency point(s).
Note:
◆ During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ SUB control to
adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The Program Scan
speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during
the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.
◆ You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.
◆ You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
◆ You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point
for FM mode.
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal
is present, regardless of the operating mode. The
transceiver will either remain on that channel for a
short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal
drops out (Carrier-operated mode). Use Menu No. 10
to select either mode. The default is Time-operated.
SCANRESUMEMETHOD
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or
memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then
continues scanning according to which resume mode
you have selected. You can choose one of the
following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.
•
Time-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or
memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,
then continues to scan, even if the signal is still
present.
•
Carrier-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or
memory channel) until the signal drops out. There
is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and
scan resumption.
SCANHOLD
This function stops Program Scan for approximately
5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the
MULTI/ CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu No. 10.
3 Press [+]/ [–] to select TO (Time-Operated) or CO
(Carrier-Operated).
To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select
ON. The default is OFF.
MHzSCAN
When you operate the main transceiver or subreceiver in VFO mode, you can scan an entire 1 MHz
frequency range within the current VFO frequency.
1 Press [VFO/M] to select VFO mode.
2 Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz
Scan. If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz
frequency, for example, select 145.650 MHz.
Scan will operate between 145.00000 MHz and
145.99999 MHz.
4 Press [MENU] to complete the setting and exit
Menu mode.
You can lock out the memory channels that you
prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer
to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 62}.
ALL-CHANNELSCAN
3 Press and hold [1MHz/ SEL] to start the MHz Scan.
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory
channels that contain frequency data in sequence,
ignoring the Memory Group number.
4 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the scan
speed.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode
via Menu No. 10.
5 To stop the MHz Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or
[CLR].
2 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
Note:
◆ You cannot change the MHz Scan speed in FM mode.
◆ You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
MEMORY SCAN
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which
you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only
a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).
68
3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust
the squelch threshold.
4 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan
Group Select mode.
• The selected Groups appear in a larger font.
5 Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all Groups so that
the transceiver scans the memory channel
sequentially, ignoring the Memory Group number
data.
14 SCAN
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to Memory
Recall mode.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode
via Menu No. 10.
7 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start All-channel Scan.
• Scan starts from the current memory channel
and ascends up through the channel numbers
(scan direction cannot be changed).
• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN].
2 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
8 To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
Note:
◆ If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Memory
Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same
conditions apply to the main transceiver.
◆ If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a
channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL
control slightly counterclockwise.
◆ Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
GROUPSCAN
For the purpose of Group Scan, the 300 memory
channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you
can select one or more groups to be scanned,
depending on the situation.
When you store frequency data in a memory channel
{page 58}, the transceiver automatically adds the
default Group 0 (zero), to the memory channel data.
To recall the existing memory channel data and
revise the Group number:
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
2 Select the desired memory channel by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
3 Press [DISP].
• The Memory Name input prompt appears.
Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a
Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN] or
[SUB] {page 63}.
4 Press the desired Group number ([0] to [9]) using
the numeric keypad. The selected Group number
appears in a larger font.
Note: You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9) for each
memory channel.
5 Press [M.IN] to store and overwrite the new
channel data to the memory channel.
6 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory
channel you want to assign to a specific group.
You can select a maximum of 10 groups and
sequentially scan the channels that belong to those
groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group
number and repeats the sequence, for example,
group 3 ➞ group 5 ➞ group 7 ➞ group 3.
3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust
the squelch threshold.
4 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan
Group Select mode. Then, using the numeric
keypad, enter the group numbers you want to
scan. i.e.- Press [3] for group 3, or press [3], [5],
[7] for groups 3, 5, and 7. The selected Memory
Groups appear in a larger font.
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to exit Scan Group Select
mode.
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to start Memory
Group Scan.
• Scan ascends up through the channel numbers
(scan direction cannot be changed).
• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN].
7 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].
After using Group Scan, press [FUNC],
[SCAN/ SG.SEL], then [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all
the Group numbers you selected in step 4. This
returns you to All-channel Scan (factory default).
Note:
◆ If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Group
Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same
conditions apply to the main transceiver.
◆ If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a
channel in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
◆ When the current channel is within one of the groups that you
selected, Scan starts with the current channel.
◆ When the current channel is outside all the groups that you
selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger than
and closest to the group number of the current channel.
◆ Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
CALLSCAN
A Call channel can be stored for each operating
band, such as HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz
and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional) bands. You can
monitor one of these Call channels and the current
operating frequency alternatively.
1 Select the frequency you want to monitor.
• In VFO mode, press [A/B] to select VFO A or B
for the main transceiver or press [SUB] or
[CTRL] to select the sub-receiver VFO. Then,
turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH
control to select the desired frequency.
• In Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M] to
select the memory channel you want to monitor
by turning the MULTI/ CH control.
2 Press [CALL/ C.IN] to recall the Call channel for
the frequency band.
69
14 SCAN
3 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL].
4 The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency
or memory channel are monitored alternatively.
■ Changing the Number of Channels to Scan
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu
No. 11.
VISUALSCAN
3 Press [+]/ [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to
scan.
While you are receiving, Visual Scan allows you to
monitor frequencies near the current operating
frequency. Visual Scan graphically displays how all
frequencies in the selected range are busy. You will
see a maximum of 7 segments, for each frequency
(channel) point that represent relative S-meter levels.
Determine the scan range by selecting the center
frequency and the number of channels. The default
number of channels is 61.
■ Using Visual Scan (VFO)
1 Select the desired band for Visual Scan.
2 Turn the Tuning control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN], to select the operating frequency.
• This frequency will be used as the center
frequency.
3 Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (VFO).
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note:
◆ The current frequency step of the MULTI/ CH control is used
for the Visual Scan.
◆ While performing the Visual Scan, the DUAL WATCH
function {page 47} is temporarily disabled unless you are
using the 144 MHz or 430/ 440 MHz in FM or AM mode and
the Control Band for the main transceiver.
◆ If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the subreceiver, the frequency is transferred to the main display,
then the Visual Scan starts.
◆ If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode, the
memory channel frequencies will be scanned.
◆ Visual Scan stops when you transmit.
◆ Depending on the transceiver conditions, Visual Scan and
the S-meter level may differ.
■ Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel)
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
•
•
The center frequency is displayed on the
main frequency display and the current
scanning frequency is displayed on the sub
frequency display. The operating mode and
the number of channels to be scanned are
displayed on the main dot-matrix display.
The sub dot-matrix display shows the
relative S-meter level of each frequency
point, vertically.
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears
on the main dot-matrix display. While the
Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the
paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to
resume the Visual Scan.
4 To change the current scanning frequency, turn
the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
• The displayed frequency changes and the
cursor moves.
• Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current
scanning frequency the new center
frequency.
• You can move the frequency using the Tuning
control. If you want to revert to the original
center frequency, press [FM/ AM/ NAR].
5 To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or
[SCAN/ SG.SEL].
70
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu
No. 11.
3 Press [+]/ [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to
scan.
4 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
5 Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (Memory
Channel).
•
The center memory channel number is
displayed on the main frequency display
and the current scanning frequency is
displayed on the sub frequency display.
The operating mode of the center memory
channel and the number of channels to be
scanned are displayed on the main dotmatrix display. The sub dot-matrix display
shows the relative S-meter level of each
frequency point, vertically.
•
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears
on the main dot-matrix display. While the
Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the
paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to
resume the Visual Scan.
14 SCAN
6 To change the current scanning frequency,
turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN].
• The displayed memory channel number
changes and the cursor moves.
• Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current
scanning frequency the new center
scanning channel.
7 To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or
[SCAN/ SG.SEL].
71
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning)
APO (Auto Power OFF)
The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) allows the transceiver to
adjust the center receiving frequency automatically
when you operate on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode.
When the receiving audio signal is distorted or breaking
up, turn this function on to adjust the center receiving
frequency. Some old 1.2 GHz transceivers do not have
stable and precise oscillating circuits and tend to be
slightly off (drifted from) the displayed frequency.
Press [FUNC], [XIT/ ALT] to toggle between the ALT
function ON or OFF.
• “ALT” appears when the function is ON.
You can set the TS-2000(X) to switch OFF
automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or
adjusted for a certain period of time. 1 minute before
the transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is output in
Morse code. You can select the time from OFF, 60,
120, and 180 minutes.
Note: The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) works only on the 1.2 GHz band
in FM mode.
ANTENNAS
Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 57.
Select the APO time from OFF, 60, 120, or 180
minutes.
Note:
◆ The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.
◆ The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key
presses, no control adjustments, and no command (RS-232C
port) sequences are detected.
HF/ 50 MHz Band
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/
50 MHz band on the rear panel {page 13}. When you
operate the main transceiver on these frequencies,
you can select one of 2 antennas.
Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2
for the main transceiver.
” or “
” appears to indicate which
• “
antenna is selected.
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1},
matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and
antenna is important. To adjust the impedance
between the antenna and the transceiver, you have
the choice of using the internal tuner or an external
tuner. This section describes how to use the internal
tuner. For the external tuner, consult the instruction
manual that comes with the tuner.
The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored
in the antenna band memory. Next time you select
the same band, the same antenna will be
automatically selected.
1 Select the transmit frequency.
Antenna Selection Frequency Range (MHz)
0.03 ~ 2.5
2.5 ~ 4.1
4.1 ~ 7.5
7.5 ~ 10.5
10.5 ~ 14.5
14.5 ~ 18.5
18.5 ~ 21.5
21.5 ~ 25.5
25.5 ~ 30.0
30.0 ~ 60.0
Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector
only, then select ANT 1. The internal tuner will be automatically
bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.
2 Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or
ANT 2.
• If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1
connector, select ANT 2 to use the internal
antenna tuner. The internal antenna tuner is
automatically bypassed if an external antenna
tuner is connected to ANT 1.
3 Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
• “AT ” appears, indicating that the internal
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
S
PWR
ALC
1
3
10
5
7
25
9
20
50
40
60dB
100W%
FILTER
VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz Band
When you select the VHF, UHF, or 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/
TS-B2000 optional) band on the main transceiver
and/or the sub-receiver, the following antenna is
automatically selected based on the operating
frequencies.
MAIN transceiver
(MHz)
SUB-receiver
(MHz)
118 ~ 174 (K-type)
142 ~ 152 (K-type)
220 ~ 300 (K-type)
144 ~ 146 (All E-types)
144 ~ 146 (All E-types)
420 ~ 450 (K-type)
300 ~ 512 (K-type)
ANT 430
430 ~ 440 (All E-types) 430 ~ 440 (All E-types)
ANT 144
ANT 1.2G 1240 ~ 1300 (All types)
N/A
Note: The same antenna is shared and used when the main
transceiver and sub-receiver are on the same band. The frequency
coverage varies depending on the market codes.
72
4 Press [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second.
• CW mode is selected and tuning begins.
• “ ” blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red.
• To cancel tuning, press [AT/ ANT1/2] again.
• If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely
high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in
Morse code) sounds and the internal tuner is
bypassed. Before attempting to tune again,
adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.
5 See the display and check that tuning has
successfully finished.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
•
•
If the tuning was successful, “AT ” stops
blinking and the MAIN band red LED turns off.
If tuning does not finish within approximately
20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code)
sounds. Press [AT/ ANT1/2] to stop the alarm
and tuning.
If you access Menu No. 27 and select ON, received
signals will also pass through the internal tuner.
When this function is ON, “
” appears. This may
reduce interference on the receive frequency.
Note:
◆ The internal tuner will not tune outside the available transmission
frequency limits.
◆ Pressing [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second while
transmitting, interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.
◆ If you would like to use a separate receiving antenna, access
Menu No. 18 and switch it ON. When this function is ON,
received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner.
◆ While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line for
both transmitting and receiving.
◆ Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds.
“AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.
◆ Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.
This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a
malfunction.
◆ Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the
internal tuner may not retune. This happens because of an SWR
calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W (approx.) transmit
power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.
◆ If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates
smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,
then attempt to tune again.
◆ Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the
transceiver conditions.
■ Presetting
After each successful tuning session, the AT
Preset memory function stores the position of the
tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of
the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna
tuner bands (see the following table) and for each
antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).
Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
• “AT ” will appear, showing that the internal
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
• Each time you go across the antenna tuner
band, the AT Preset memory is automatically
recalled to position the tuning capacitor without
the need for retuning. If no preset data exists
for a particular band/antenna combination, then
the default data of 50Ω is used.
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum
matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band
has the preset data.
AT Preset Frequency Range (MHz)
0.03 ~ 1.85
1.85 ~ 2.50
2.50 ~ 3.525
3.525 ~ 3.575
3.575 ~ 3.725
3.725 ~ 4.10
4.10 ~ 7.03
7.03 ~ 7.10
7.10 ~ 7.50
7.50 ~ 10.50
10.50 ~ 14.10
14.10 ~ 14.50
14.50 ~ 18.50
18.50 ~ 21.15
21.15 ~ 21.50
21.50 ~ 25.50
25.50 ~ 29.00
29.00 ~ 30.00
30.00 ~ 51.00
51.00 ~ 52.00
52.00 ~ 53.00
53.00 ~ 60.00
ATTENUATOR
The attenuator function is useful when extremely
strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency.
When these type of signals exist nearby your
receiving frequency, the AGC function may be
erroneously controlled by the strong signals, rather
than by the target receiving signal. If this happens,
the target receiving signal can be masked and buried
by the strong signals. In this case, turn the
Attenuator function ON.
1 Press [ATT/ F LOCK].
2 “ATT” appears.
To return to the normal operation, press [ATT/ F LOCK]
again.
Note: If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver and
the sub-receiver, the Attenuator function is on for both receivers.
AUTO MODE
You can configure a maximum of 29 points (HF/
50 MHz), 9 points (144 MHz band), 9 points (430
(440) MHz band), and 9 points (1.2 GHz band) of the
main transceiver VFO (VFO A and B) frequencies to
change the operating mode automatically when you
change the frequency.
As a default, the following modes are programmed on
each operating band.
HF/ 50 MHz band
0.03 ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB
9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB
144 MHz band
142 ~ 152 MHz: FM
430 (440) MHz band
420 ~ 450 MHz: FM
1.2 GHz band (optional)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: FM
To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode
selection:
73
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
1 Press and hold [USB/ LSB/ AUTO]+[
(POWER) to turn the transceiver ON.
]
2 Press [+] or [–] to select the band to add the
frequency points.
3 Select a memory channel number by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
4 Turn the Tuning control to select a desired
frequency point to change the operating mode.
Or, press [ENT] to enter the desired frequency
point {page 37} using the numeric keys.
5 Press one of the mode keys to select the desired
operating mode.
• The selected mode appears on the main dotmatrix display.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the
data.
7 Press [CLR] to store the data.
The table below shows the default Auto Mode
frequency points for the HF/ 50 MHz band. When
you activate the Auto Mode selection by pressing
[FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], the transceiver
automatically selects the mode; LSB for frequencies
below 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than
or equal to 9.5 MHz.
Channel No.
0
1
2
3
•
•
28
Data
9.5 MHz
LSB
9.5 MHz
LSB
9.5 MHz
LSB
9.5 MHz
LSB
•
•
9.5 MHz
LSB
Operating mode
0
1
2
3
•
•
28
74
Data
1.62 MHz
AM
9.5 MHz
LSB
9.5 MHz
LSB
9.5 MHz
LSB
•
•
9.5 MHz
LSB
Channel No.
Data
Operating mode
0
1.62 MHz
AM
0.03 MHz
≤ AM <
1.62 MHz
1
2.0 MHz
CW
2
7.0 MHz
LSB
3
9.5 MHz
LSB
1.62 MHz
≤ CW <
2.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
≤ LSB <
9.5MHz
9.5 MHz
≤ FM <
53.0 MHz
•
•
•
•
28
53.0 MHz
FM
53.0 MHz
≤ USB ≤
60.0 MHz
To activate the AUTO MODE function, press [FUNC],
[LSB/ USB/ AUTO].
0.03 MHz
≤ LSB <
9.5 MHz
9.5 MHz
≤ USB ≤
60.0 MHz
The table below is an example of how to add the
frequency point of 1.62 MHz/ AM into memory. With
this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below
1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and
USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.
Channel No.
The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency
points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver
selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from
1.62 MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to
9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and
USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60.0 MHz. If multiple
data contains the same frequency but a different
mode is entered into memory, the lowest numbered
memory channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.
Operating mode
0.03 MHz
≤ AM <
1.62 MHz
1.62 MHz
≤ LSB <
9.5 MHz
9.5 MHz
≤ USB ≤
60.0 MHz
BEEP FUNCTION
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,
error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.
Although you can turn the beep function OFF by
accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it
ON in order to detect unexpected errors and
malfunctions.
You can also change the output level of the beeps by
accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting 1 to 9.
The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you
which mode is selected when you change operating
modes.
When you change operating Modes, the following
Morse code sounds:
Mode
Morse Code Output
LSB
· – ··
(L)
USB
·· –
(U)
CW
–·–·
(C)
–·–· ·–·
(CR)
·–·
(R)
·–· ·–·
(RR)
AM/ AMN
·–
(A)
FM/ FMN
·· – ·
(F)
CW-R
FSK
FSK-R
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
The transceiver also generates the following warning,
confirmation, and malfunction beeps.
Beeps
What it means
A high pitched short beep A valid key is pressed.
A high pitched long beep
A low pitched short beep
“UL” in Morse code
“S” in Morse code
“5” in Morse code
“SWR” in Morse code
“CHECK” in Morse code
“BT” in Morse code
“AR” in Morse code
A Key entry is accepted,
Scan starts, or AT tune
has completed.
An invalid operation is
performed.
The internal PLL circuit
unlock status is detected.
CW Auto Tune cannot be
completed, or an invalid
frequency is entered.
AT Tune cannot be
completed within the
specified time.
The antenna’s SWR is too
high (over 10:1) to
perform AT Tune.
1 minute before the APO
(Auto Power Off) function
switches the transceiver
OFF.
Waiting for a CW
message to be recorded.
The current message
memory is full.
CALL CHANNEL
A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used
when looking for a station with which to make contact
in FM mode. Each frequency band (HF, 50 MHz,
144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz) has one
CALL channel. The default CALL frequencies are
shown below.
To recall the CALL channel:
2 Press [CALL/ C.IN] again to return to the previous
operating frequency.
To revise the default CALL channel frequency:
1 Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode
on the VFO.
2 Press [FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to copy the new
frequency and mode to the CALL channel.
1
HF
Default CALL Channel
frequency and Mode
29.60 MHz / FM
50 MHz
51.00 MHz/ FM
144 MHz
144.00 MHz/ FM
430/ 440 MHz
430.00 MHz1, 440.00 MHz2/ FM
1.2 GHz
1240.00 MHz/ FM
All E-types
2
K-type
BRIGHTNESS
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected
from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 00.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
CONTRAST
The contrast of the LCD dot-matrix display can be
selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No. 59.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 59.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select an appropriate contrast
from 1 to 16.
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
KEY ILLUMINATION
The front panel key illumination can be switched ON
or OFF.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 01.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select ON or OFF.
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
DTMF
MANUAL DTMF DIALING
If you have an optional MC-52DM microphone, you
can send DTMF tones while you are transmitting.
1 Press [CALL/ C.IN].
Band
DISPLAY
To send a series of DTMF tones:
1 Press Mic [PTT] or [SEND] on the front panel.
2 Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit.
• DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker.
3 Release Mic [PTT] or press [SEND] on the front
panel to return to receive mode.
DTMF MEMORY
■ Entering DTMF tones
The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels.
Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF tones.
You can also name each DTMF entry using a
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45.
2 Press [SUB] to access Menu No. 45A.
3 Press [SUB] again to enter DTMF Memory
Channel mode.
75
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
DTMF Pause Period
4 Select a DTMF Memory Channel (0 to 9) using the
MULTI/ CH control.
5 Press [SUB] to enter the desired memory name.
Use [+]/ [–] to select the characters. Press
[MAIN] or [SUB] to move the cursor left or right
while entering the DTMF memory name. You can
also use the Mic DTMF keys to enter the
characters. Refer to the table on page 63 for the
available characters and numbers.
6 Press [M.IN] to store the name into memory.
7 Select the desired DTMF tone using [+]/ [–], then
press [SUB] to move the cursor to the right to
enter the next DTMF tone.
8 Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired DTMF
tones. You can enter a maximum of 16 DTMF
tones for each DTMF Memory Channel.
In the DTMF Memory, you can enter blanks (pauses)
among a series of DTMF tones. The default pause
period is set to 500 ms, but you can change this
value by accessing Menu No. 45C.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45C.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select the desired DTMF Pause
period (default is 500 ms).
3 Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
HF RX ANTENNA
If you have a separate HF antenna (below 30 MHz)
only for receiving, connect the antenna coaxial cable
to the HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel. This
connector is considered to be connected to a
beverage antenna or directional loop antenna for lowband operation.
To use the HF RX ANTENNA connector, access
Menu No. 18 and select ON. When the HF RX
” appears on
ANTENNA is selected for receiving, “
the display.
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL
9 Press [M.IN] to store the data into memory.
■ Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data
To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while you
are transmitting:
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR] while you are
transmitting.
2 The DTMF Memory Channel number and the
memory name appear on the main dot-matrix
display.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the DTMF
Memory Channel you want to transmit.
4 Press QUICK MEMO [MR] to transmit the DTMF
tones.
• The DTMF tones are monitored through the
speaker while they are transmitted.
■ DTMF Tone Time Length
When transmitting a series of DTMF tones, each tone
duration is set to the 50 ms (tone)/ 50 ms (mute)
format as default. Some repeaters or auto patch
controllers may require longer DTMF tones and mutes.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45B.
2 Press [–] to select SLOW.
3 Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100 ms
(tone)/ 100 ms (mute) format.
76
When you connect an external HF linear amplifier
to the TS-2000(X) transceiver using the REMOTE
connector, select 1 (fast switching/ 10 ms delay) or
2 (slow switching/ 25 ms delay) to activate the
internal relay so you can interface with the HF
linear amplifier {page 94}.
Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission
delay time because of the slow antenna relay
switching time. In this case, select 2 for the slow
switching.
If you have 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2
GHz band linear amplifiers, connect the linear
amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector
for these bands {page 96}.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control
to select Menu No. 28A (HF), 28B (50 MHz),
28C (144 MHz), 28D (430 (440) MHz), or
28E (1.2 GHz).
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, or 2.
• OFF disables the TS-2000(X) relay.
• 1 is 10 ms transmission delay.
• 2 is 25 ms transmission delay.
Note: If CW full break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay is
applied regardless of the Menu No. 28 settings.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
LOCK FUNCTIONS
•
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION
•
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or
changing the current settings.
Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle Frequency
Lock ON or OFF.
• “
” appears when this function is ON.
Directly select a Menu No. without pressing
[MENU] and turning the MULTI/ CH control.
Activate the same function as one of the front
panel keys.
One of the following functions can be assigned to
each PF key. Selecting OFF assigns no function to
the PF key.
A.N.
ANT1/2
A=B
A/B
B.C. CALL CH1
CH2
CH3
CLR CTRL
CW TUNE
DSP MONI
FINE
M.IN
M.IN(QUICK MEMO)
MR (QUICK MEMO)
MsVFO
MENU Number
NB
N.R.
OFF 1MHz
RX MONI
SCAN SPLIT TF-SET VFO/M
VOICE1
VOICE2
MONITOR
The following keys and controls are disabled by
Frequency Lock:
A=B
MULTI/ CH
control
CALL
CLR
CW/ FSK
DISP
ENT
FM/ AM
SATL
LSB/ USB/AUTO
QUICK MEMO
[M.IN]
SCAN/ SG.SEL
M.IN
QUICK MEMO
[MR]
SPLIT
UP/ DOWN
VFO/ M
1MHz/ SEL
1/ CH1/REC
2/ CH2/REC
3/ CH3/REC
9/ FINE/STEP
+/ –
Tuning control
MsVFO
A/B
Note:
◆ After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control and
[+]/ [–] are still available in Menu mode.
◆ After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the transmit
frequency with the Tuning control while in TF-SET mode.
◆ After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control is still
available for selections other than frequency and memory
channel changes.
◆ After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] may be available in some
situations.
When you are receiving while the squelch function is
ON, weak signals become intermittent.
Or, if the CTCSS function is ON, you may want to
disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor
the current channel activities.
In these cases, use the MONITOR function to disable
the squelch function temporarily.
To assign the MONITOR function to a [PF] key on the
front panel:
1 Press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 51A.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select RX MONI.
3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: You can also assign the MONITOR function to a
programmable function key on an optional MC-47 microphone.
PF KEY
You can program the front panel [PF] key to assign a
function that you frequently use. The default is Voice
1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer, VS-3 {page 91}.
You can assign one of the functions in
“MICROPHONE PF KEYS” to this PF key, accessing
Menu No. 51A.
LOCK ALL FUNCTION
The Lock All function disables all the keys and
controls on the TS-2000 transceiver, except [FUNC],
[PRE/ LOCK A], Mic [PTT] and [FUNC],
[ATT/ F LOCK].
Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle between the
Lock All function ON or OFF.
• “
” appears when this function is ON.
To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],
[PRE/ LOCK A].
MICROPHONE PF KEYS
When using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM
microphone, you can customize the functions of the
Microphone PF1 (CALL), PF2 (VFO), PF3 (MR), and
PF4 (PF) keys. You can assign the following types of
functions to these keys via Menu Nos. 51B ~ 51E:
RISE TIME OF CW
The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF
output to rise to its maximum power after the key is
closed. The default setting, 6 ms, is fine for slow to
medium keying speed and normal weighting (dot/
dash ratio). The 4, 2 or 1 ms settings are good for
faster keying speeds.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 32.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select the desired rise time
(default is 6 ms).
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
77
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
RX DSP EQUALIZER
If you want to reverse the output:
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/ FM/ AM)
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 17.
Use Menu No. 20 to change the receiver frequency
responses of the target signal. You can select one
from six different receiver profiles including the
default flat response. Selecting any of the following
items from the Menu causes “
” to appear on
the display.
•
Off (OFF):
The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and
AM.
•
High boost (H BOOST):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective for
a bassy voice.
•
Formant pass (F PASS):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies
outside the normal voice frequency range.
•
Bass boost (B BOOST):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective for
a voice with more high frequency components.
•
Conventional (CONVEN):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and
higher.
•
User (USER):
Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is
programmed at the factory as a default.
SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT
The TS-2000(X) has 2 independent receivers and is
capable of receiving 2 different frequencies at the
same time. If no external speaker is connected to the
TS-2000(X), both audio signals are mixed internally,
then output through the internal speaker.
1 Connect the external speaker(s) to the EXT.SP1
and/or EXT.SP2 jack on the rear panel {page 2}.
2 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 16.
3 Press [+]/ [–] to select 0, 1 or 2.
0
1
2
L-channel
R-channel
Main & Sub Mixed Main & Sub Mixed
Main
Sub
Main + 1/4 Sub
Sub + 1/4 Main
If you are using an external speaker on EXT.SP2, you
can configure the transceiver to make a separate
output for each receiver.
OUTPUT
EXT.SP1 EXT.SP2
–
√
–
√
78
–
–
√
√
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The output is now reversed.
Note: If you are using headphones, the transceiver mutes. The left
channel represents the internal SP or EXT.SP1 and the right channel
represents the EXT.SP2.
S-METER SQUELCH
The S-meter Squelch function opens the squelch only
when the receiving signal has the same or greater
strength than the S-meter Squelch setting. This
function helps you to not open the squelch when
receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 19A.
2 Press [+] to select ON.
3 Turn the MAIN SQL control and/or the SUB SQL
control to adjust the S-meter Squelch threshold
level. When you turn SQL control, the indicators
on the S-meter move accordingly.
4 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
Note: The squelch threshold level of the S-meter squelch is
around the 9 o’clock position for FM (both MAIN and SUB SQL),
the 11 o’clock position for other modes (MAIN SQL), and the 9
o’clock position for AM (SUB SQL), regardless of the SQL controls
position.
SQUELCH HANG TIME
You can adjust the squelch hang time to continuously
monitor unstable signals. When the signal is
temporarily weaker than the S-meter Squelch
threshold level, the squelch does not mute the signal
for a short period of time. In this way, you can
continuously monitor the unstable signal.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 19B.
4 Press [MENU] to store the setting.
Menu Selection
2 Press [+] to select ON.
Internal
SP1 (L) SP2 (R)
SP (L)
√
N/A
N/A
Mutes
√
N/A
√
N/A
√
Mutes
√
√
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 125 ms, 250 ms, or
500 ms.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
TIME-OUT TIMER
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each
transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long
accidental transmission.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 24.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 3 minutes, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
TNC
TX MONITOR
This transceiver has a built-in TNC that is usually
used for the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} or
SkyCommand II+ operations {page 83}. However,
you can also utilize the built-in TNC as a high
(9600 bps) or normal (1200 bps) speed TNC. The
TNC can be controlled by an external PC that is
connected to COM port on the rear panel {page 49}.
Available TNC command set is listed in the Appendix.
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going
transmission sound. This is convenient when you
want to check the modulation sound quality of the
transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK
signal that the TS-2000(X) is transmitting.
If you desire, you can connect an external TNC or
proprietary TNC/ MCP to ACC2 connector. To
interface an external TNC/ MCP with the TS-2000(X),
refer to the ACC2 connector information {page 95}
and accessing Menu Nos. 50B ~ 50F then configure
and adjust the Menu parameters to work with the
external TNC/ MCP.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the monitor
sound level from OFF, and 1 to 9.
Note: You do not have to disable the built-in TNC to interface with an
external TNC. Both the main transceiver and sub-receiver can work
independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the same
band.
1 Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI].
2 The current TX monitor setting appears.
4 Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor
level.
Note:
◆ We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB,
AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.
◆ The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX
monitor function. Use the CW sidetone function to monitor CW
transmissions (Menu Nos. 13 and 31).
TRANSVERTER
TX POWER
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-2000
operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can
use this TS-2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter.
Consult the instruction manual that came with the
transverter for interfacing to the TS-2000.
You can adjust the transmission output power by
pressing [PWR/ TX MONI] and turning MULTI/ CH
control. If more precise power adjustment is
required, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. When
this menu is ON, the power adjustment steps change
as shown in the table below.
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2,
ANT 144, ANT 430, or ANT 1.2G (TS-2000
optional) connector on the rear of the transceiver.
2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the main
transceiver of the TS-2000(X).
• The transverter will use this frequency as the
reference for converting frequencies.
3 Access Menu No. 25, and select ON by pressing
[+].
• The output power is automatically set to the
lowest power for that frequency. See TX
POWER (below).
4 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the
Menu mode.
5 Press [ENT], then set the target converting
frequency, using the numeric keys.
6 Press [ENT] to complete the entry.
7 The transceiver displays the target transverter
frequency instead of the actual operating
frequency.
Band
HF/ 50 MHz/
144 MHz
430/ 440
MHz
1.2 GHz
Menu No. 23 Menu No. 23
OFF
ON
SSB/ CW/ 5 ~ 100 W 5 ~ 100 W
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1
5 ~ 25 W
5 ~ 25 W
AM
in steps of 5 in steps of 1
SSB/ CW/
5 ~ 50 W
5 ~ 50 W
FM/ FSK in steps of 5 in steps of 1
5 ~ 12.5 W
AM
in steps of 1
SSB/ CW/
1 ~ 10 W
FM/ FSK
in steps of 1
1 ~ 2.5 W
AM
in steps of 1
Mode
Note:
◆ The output power settings are stored independently for HF, 50 MHz,
144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000
optional). As shown in the table above, you can also store different
output power settings for AM and other modes for each operating
band.
◆ For AM mode in the 430/ 440 MHz band and the 1.2 GHz (TS2000/ TS-B2000 optional) band, the final step is 0.5 W, rather
than 1 W.
Note: When using a transverter, not all the functions of this
transceiver are available.
79
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
QUICK DATA TRANSFER
■ Transferring Data
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and
conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode
to another compatible transceiver. Compatible
transceivers include:
• TS-2000(X)
• TS-570S/ 570D
• TS-850S
• TS-870S
• TS-690S
• TS-950SDX
• TS-450S
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Master,
sending data to the Slave transceiver.
Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A
spotting station that is searching for new contest
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to
the running (main) station.
SETTING UP
■ Equipment Needed
In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following
equipment is required:
Transfer to TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S:
• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a
9-pin RS-232C female connector at both ends.
Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-2000(X),
TS-570, and TS-870S:
• KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit.
• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a
9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end and a
25-pin RS-232C female connector at the other
end.
• One straight cable. This cable must have a
6-pin DIN male connector at both ends.
■ Connections
For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers,
see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT”
{page 93}.
Note: If you are using a DSP-100 unit with the transceiver, turn on
the transceiver first, then turn on the DSP-100.
USING QUICK TRANSFER
When connecting with another TS-2000(X), TS-570,
or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate
on each transceiver. If transferring to or from other
KENWOOD transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop
bits. On the TS-2000(X), set the parameter in Menu
No. 56 to 4800 bps.
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.
80
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
refer to the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an
operating frequency and mode.
3 On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• When using another TS-2000(X) as the Slave,
“PC” appears on the Slave.
• The displayed data is stored in Quick memory
channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the
Slave.
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency is
added to the receive frequency to be transferred.
■ Receiving Data
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Slave,
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The
Slave can receive data using either Quick memory
channel 0 or the VFO.
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
refer to the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 53 and select
either OFF (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or ON
(the VFO).
• The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate operation
to send data.
• For the correct method, refer to the instruction
manual that came with the transceiver.
Note:
◆ If you always use the TS-2000(X) for receiving only, activate the
TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 54 to avoid unintentional
transmission.
◆ When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a
simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data on both
VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to OFF.
◆ When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with
split frequencies, the received data replaces the data only on the
TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is
not changed.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
COMPUTER CONTROL
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can
change the computer into an electronic console from
which you can remotely control functions of the
transceiver. This capability makes remote operation
of your transceiver possible from across the room,
from another room, or when coupled with other
commercially available products and where lawful,
from another city, state, or country via a telephone
connection.
If you have a DTMF microphone, you can use the
microphone as a wired remote control unit as
described below.
Note:
◆ You can use the front panel controls while using computer
control. Settings done from the front panel are effective
immediately.
◆ After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values and
settings on the front panel are restored.
1 Plug the DTMF microphone into the microphone
connector of the transceiver.
2 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45D.
3 Press [+] to select ON.
4 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The DTMF keys function as follows:
DTMF
key
Function
FUNC
mode
DTMF
key
Function
FUNC
mode
1
Scan
–
9
Squelch 1
Up/ Down
–
2
Tone/
CTCSS/
DCS
Code
Select
0
PWR 1
Up/ Down
–
3
REV
SHIFT
A
ENT
–
4
MHz
–
B
CTRL
MAIN/
SUB
5
MONI
C
Repeater
–
To design your programs, consult “APPENDIX” for the
necessary information.
6
Voice 1
D
FUNC
FUNC
OFF
■ Connections
7
Volume
Down
Down
Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy.
See the diagram given in “CONNECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 93}.
8
Band
Up
Up
SETTING UP
■ Equipment Needed
•
•
•
A PC equipped with an RS-232C serial port.
One straight cable. This cable must have a 9-pin
D-Sub RS-232C female connector at one end, and
at the other end a 9-pin or a 25-pin D-Sub
RS-232C female connector that mates with the
RS-232C port of your computer.
Transceiver control application.
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer, switch
OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
In order to control the transceiver by computer, you
must first choose the communication parameters.
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver
control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and
no parity.
2 On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate
and number of stop bits via Menu No. 56.
• The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.
1
LOCK
ON 2
LOCK
OFF 2
1
–
–
#
1
Use the [#] (Up) and [ ](Down) keys to change the settings of
these functions.
2 The LOCK function is for the microphone keypad.
Note:
◆ Microphone Remote does not function while transmitting.
◆ You can use the DTMF Memory function {page 75} with the
Microphone Remote function.
◆ The Repeater function is available for K-type models only.
◆ Normally, pressing [2] cycles through Tone, CTCSS, DCS, and
OFF. However, if 1750 Hz is selected for Tone, pressing [2] will
only transmit the 1750 Hz tone. To return to Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS
mode, you must first deselect 1750 Hz for Tone.
◆ Press [D] to enter FUNC mode, to use the 2nd function of the
DTMF keys. Pressing [D] while in FUNC mode will exit FUNC
mode.
◆ [FUNC] on the transceiver works independently from the
Microphone Remote [FUNC] key.
Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates, the
RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed
communications parameters.
81
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL
(K-type ONLY)
If you have a Kenwood TH-D7A handheld transceiver,
you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and
440 MHz bands of the TS-2000(X) transceiver, using
FM mode. You will be controlling one band on the
TS-2000(X) transceiver while sending DTMF tones to
the other band from the remote control transceiver.
This function is useful, for example, when you want to
control the VHF/ UHF FM repeater function of the
TS-2000(X) transceiver from a location outside your
home or vehicle.
Note:
◆ To remotely control the TS-2000(X), you can also use a handheld
transceiver which does not have a remote control function, but a
DTMF function. You must, however, manually send DTMF tones
for control code strings. Skip steps 1 and 3 in “PREPARATION”,
below.
◆ FCC rules permit you to send control codes only on the 440 MHz
band.
PREPARATION
CONTROL OPERATION
When in Remote Control mode, the DTMF keys of the
control transceiver will function as shown in the table
below. Each time you press the desired key, the
transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and
send the corresponding command to the mobile.
Note: If you are using a transceiver without a remote control
function, manually send “AXXX#YA#” where “XXX” is your 3-digit
secret number and “Y” is a single-digit control command. If you do
not add ”A#” on the end, you can skip sending “AXXX#” next time;
however, the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other stations.
1
DCS ON
9
MR
2
TONE ON
0
LOW
3
CTCSS ON
A
ENTER
4
DCS OFF
B
TONE SEL
5
TONE OFF
C
REPEATER ON
6
CTCSS OFF
D
REPEATER OFF
7
CALL
8
VFO
DOWN
#
UP
Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS-2000
transceiver will be controlled.
To change the transmit/ receive frequency:
On the control transceiver:
([VFO] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary
digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([VFO] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])
1 Program a 3-digit secret number.
• If you are using a TH-D7A, see “WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROL” in its instruction manual.
2 Select the transmit frequency on the 440 MHz
band.
3 Enter the Remote Control mode.
On the TS-2000 transceiver:
4 Access Menu 61C, and select the same secret
number that you selected in step 1.
5 Select the receive frequency on the 440 MHz
band of the sub-receiver.
• Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency
on the control transceiver.
6 Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or
Control band for the main transceiver.
7 To have the TS-2000(X) transceiver send a control
acknowledgment to the handheld, access Menu
61D and select “ON”.
• DTMF tones which represent the secret
number will be used as an acknowledgment.
8 Access Menu 61E and select “ON”.
” appears when the TS-2000(X) enters
• “
Remote Control mode.
82
To recall a memory channel:
([MR] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary
digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([MR] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])
To change the tone (or CTCSS) frequency:
([TONE SEL] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter 2 digits; ex. [0], [5])
➡ [TONE SEL])
• Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35.
• First activate the Tone or CTCSS function. You
can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone
and CTCSS functions.
Note: While in Wireless Remote Control mode, you can perform only
the following operations on the TS-2000(X) transceiver.
• Transmit
• Acknowledge ON/ OFF
• Secret Number Change
• Partial/ Full Reset
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY)
PREPARATION
The Sky Command II+ allows you to remotely control
the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a separate location.
Since the TS-2000(X) transceiver has an independent
VHF and UHF sub-receiver in addition to the main
transceiver, the sub-receiver can work as a
“Transporter” without requiring another VHF/ UHF
transceiver.
Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A,
or another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a “Commander”
(an external remote control unit), the following
procedure shows how to set up your TS-2000 as a
“Transporter” at a base station and the TM-D700A as
a “Commander”.
So, if you already have Kenwood’s TH-D7A handheld
or TM-D700A mobile transceiver, you can immediately
start enjoying Sky Command II+ features to remotely
control the HF/ 50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X).
TS-2000 (Transporter) Setup:
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
Or, if you have a friend who has another TS-2000(X),
you can also use his/her TS-2000(X) as a
“Commander” (a remote unit) to control the HF/
50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X) at home, using VHF
and UHF bands.
You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit,
called a “Commander”. The VHF/ UHF sub-receiver
in the TS-2000(X) transceiver is called the
“Transporter”. It will function as an interface between
the Commander and the HF/ 50 MHz band of the
TS-2000(X) main transceiver.
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and
hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF
transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or
patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.
HF/ 50 MHz
VHF
2 Press [SUB] then enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY)
as a “Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Press [SUB] then enter your alias callsign
(ex: WD6DJY-1) as a “Transporter” callsign, using
[+]/ [–] or the MULTI/ CH control. To move the
cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to
store the callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and
“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long,
including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be
entered:
• WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
• WD6-DJY-1
You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
• -WD6DJY
You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.
• WD6DJY-19
An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Command II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
UHF
Your shack
TM-D700A/ TH-D7A/
TS-2000(X)
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+.
Select 1200 bps for TM-D700A (9600 bps can be
used only when you use another TS-2000(X) as a
“Commander”).
7 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
II+ operation.
SKY COMMAND II + DIAGRAM
VHF freq.
Audio
Commander
Audio
POWER
PF
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
ATT
PROC
AT TUNE
B.C.
CW TUNE
FILTER
1
ANT
4
MIC
7
Control commands
tResponse
Transporter
CH2
CH3
2
3
REC
FINE
5
8
MIC
LSB
USB
DOWN
4
MENU
RF
6
MR
M.IN
–
+
2
8
0
SPLIT
TF-SET
A/B
M/V
A=B
CLEAR
RIT
CH
IF SHIFT
4
FM
AM
DELAY
ENT
CW
FSK
KEY
9
F.LOCK
0
PWR
6
NB AGC/TONE REV
CLR
AF
RIT/XIT
UP
CH1
PHONES
DSP SLOPE
HIGH
LOW
N.R.
PRE-AMP
VOX
SEND
LOW CUT
UHF freq.
Audios
Control commands
tResponse
6
2
SCAN
M>VFO
TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:
10
SQL
XIT
1MHz
8
M.IN
0
10
1 Access Menu 4–1 and 4–2 to enter the same
callsign that you entered for TS-2000(X).
2 Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for TS-2000(X)
(Transporter).
Note: Refer to Chapter 17, Sky Command II, of the TM-D700A
instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS
tone frequency.
83
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Starting Sky Command II+ operation:
Mic Key
After you have completed the following setups, you
can start Sky Command II+ operation. Without
programming these parameters, you cannot perform
Sky Command II+ operation.
Function
1
Power OFF
2
HF frequency receive ON/ OFF
3
Modulation mode switch
On the TS-2000 (Transporter):
4
RIT ON/ OFF
1 Select the desired HF frequency that you want to
be controlled on the main transceiver.
5
XIT ON/ OFF
6
RIT offset or XIT offset clear
7
Split-frequency ON/ OFF
8
2 Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the
main transceiver and another open UHF
frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62E.
9
4 Select T-PORTER (Transporter).
0
Transfer from Memory to VFO
In VFO mode: VFO A/ VFO B switch
In Memory Recall mode: no change
Current settings retrieve (from HF transceiver)
5 Press [MENU] to enter the Transporter mode.
B
VFO/ Memory Recall mode switch
C
XIT/ RIT offset frequency increase
D
XIT/ RIT offset frequency decrease
In LSB, USB, or CW mode:
10 Hz/ 1 kHz switch
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/ 10 kHz switch
In VFO mode: frequency entry ON
In Memory Recall mode: channel number
entry ON
On the TM-D700A (Commander):
1 Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that
you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
1
2 Access Menu 4–4 to select COMMANDER.
• “PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!”
appears.
3 Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to
start the Sky Command II+ operation.
CONTROL OPERATION
After setting up both the TS-2000 (Transporter) and
the TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command II+
operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in
Sky Command mode, the Mic keys of the
Commander will function as described below.
Each time you press a key, the Commander will
automatically enter transmit mode and send the
corresponding control command to the Transporter.
To switch the HF
transceiver OFF
To change the frequency
or memory channel on
the HF transceiver
To transmit audio on an
HF frequency
Press Mic [1].
Press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
Press and hold Mic
[PTT], then speak into the
microphone.
Press Mic [2].
To receive audio on an
HF frequency
To monitor the UHF band Press the Mic PF key
on the Commander
assigned to the Monitor
function.
84
#
2
1
“FS” appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/ USB/ CW) or 10 kHz
step (FM/ AM).
2
After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a frequency or
memory channel number.
When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the
current settings of the HF transceiver:
w
q
u
e
r
t
y
q HF frequency
w VFO: A, VFO: B,
MR: 00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)
e RIT, XIT
r OFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99
t LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM
y SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.
u “FS” appears when Mic [ ] is pressed.
Note:
◆ After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.
◆ The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
◆ The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the
Transporter is ON.
◆ You must set VHF frequency on the main transceiver and UHF
frequency on the sub-receiver. Otherwise, the Sky Command II+
may not operate properly.
◆ When the TS-2000(X) exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the
operating frequency of VFO A will be set to the VHF frequency
that the Sky Command II+ was operated.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER
4 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
“Transporter” for the VHF and UHF bands.
To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a “Commander” (an
external remote control unit), follow the steps below.
Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a
“Commander” (described on the previous page).
Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A
instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS
tone frequency.
TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:
CONTROL OPERATION
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
First, switch the TS-2000 transceiver ON and select
T-PORTER (Transporter) from Menu 62E.
2 Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
“Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
Then, access Menu 4–4 on the TH-D7A and select
“COMMANDER”. “PUSH [0] KEY TO START
COMMANDER!!” appears.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and
“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long
including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be
entered:
• WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
• WD6-DJY-1
You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
• -WD6DJY
You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.
• WD6DJY-19
An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+.
Select 1200 bps for TH-D7A (9600 bps can be
used only when you use another TS-2000 as a
“Commander”).
7 Assign the TNC band to the sub-band by
accessing Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
operation.
Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command
mode.
When in Sky Command mode, the keys of the TH-D7A
(Commander) will function as described below. Only
[LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control functions will
not change.
Each time you press the desired key, the Commander
will automatically enter transmit mode and send the
corresponding control command to the TS-2000
(Transporter).
To switch the HF
transceiver OFF
Press [POWER].
To transmit audio on a
HF frequency
Press and hold the PTT
switch, then speak into
the microphone.
To receive audio on an
HF frequency
Press [RX].
To monitor the UHF band
Press and hold [MONI].
on the Commander
TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:
1 Access Menu 4–1 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).
2 Access Menu 4–2 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).
3 Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for the TS-2000(X)
(Transporter).
85
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Key
Function
Tuning
control
Frequency or memory channel number
change
UP
UP/ DWN RIT offset or XIT offset change
In VFO mode: VFO A/ VFO B switch
In Memory Recall mode: no change
A/B
POWER
RX
RX
1
Power ON/ OFF
HF frequency receive ON/ OFF
1
MODE
Modulation mode switch
RIT
1
RIT ON/ OFF
XIT
1
XIT ON/ OFF
CLR
1
RIT offset or XIT offset clear
SPLIT
1
Split-frequency ON/ OFF
M➧V
1
Transfer from Memory to VFO
In LSB, USB, or CW mode:
10 Hz/ 1 kHz switch
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/ 10 kHz switch
FAST
SYNC
1
1
1
Current settings retrieve
(from HF transceiver)
ENT
In VFO mode: frequency entry ON
In Memory Recall mode: channel number
entry ON
M/V
VFO/ Memory Recall mode switch
After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys to
enter a frequency or memory channel number.
When [0/ SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows
the current settings of the HF transceiver:
w
t
q
e
y
r
u
q HF frequency
w A (VFO A), B (VFO B),
00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)
e RIT, XIT
r OFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99
t “FS” appears when [FAST] is ON.
y LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM
u SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.
Note:
◆ On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will
function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the
Transporter to generate an error beep.
◆ After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.
◆ The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
◆ The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the
Transporter is ON.
86
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER
To use another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a
“Commander” (an external remote control unit), follow
the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a
TM-D700A as a “Commander” (described on
pages 83 and 84).
TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2 Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
“Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and
“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long
including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be
entered:
• WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
• WD6-DJY-1
You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
• -WD6DJY
You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.
• WD6DJY-19
An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Command II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+.
• Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps.
7 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
II+ operation.
TS-2000 (Commander) Setup:
1 Access Menu No. 62A and 62B to enter the same
callsign that you entered for the TS-2000
(Transporter).
2 Access Menu No. 62C to select the same CTCSS
tone frequency that you selected for the TS-2000
(Transporter).
3 Access Menu No. 62D and select the same
communication speed that you selected for the
TS-2000 (Transporter).
4 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
5 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
“Transporter” for the main transceiver and subreceiver.
Starting Sky Command ll+ operation:
1 On the Transporter, access Menu No. 62E.
2 Select T-PORTER (Transporter).
3 On the Commander, access Menu No. 62E.
4 Select COMMANDER (Commander).
5 Press [MAIN] on the Commander to start the
operation.
Control
Function
Turn to control the operating
frequency.
MULTI/ CH Turn to control the operating
control
frequency rapidly.
Press to monitor the current
[MAIN]
receiving frequency.
Press to re-syncronize all the
[SUB]
information between the transporter
and commander.
Press to move up or down the
[+]/ [–]
operating band (HF/ 50 MHz
amateur radio bands).
Press to toggle between VFO mode
[VFO/ M]
and Memory Recall mode.
Press to enter a desired frequency
using the numeric keypad or a
[ENT]
memory channel number in Memory
Recall mode.
Press to transfer the memory
[M
[MsVFO]
channel information to VFO.
[A/B]
Press to select VFO A or B.
Press to toggle SPLIT operation ON
[SPLIT]
and OFF.
[LSB/ USB] Press to select LSB or USB.
Press to select CW. FSK cannot be
[CW/ FSK]
selected.
[FM/ AM]
Press to select FM or AM.
Press to activate the RIT and/or XIT
[RIT]/ [XIT]
function.
Press to clear the offset frequency
[CLEAR]
for RIT and/or XIT.
Press to switch the Speech
[PROC]
Processor Function ON.
Press to toggle the Auto Notch
[A.N.]
function ON and OFF.
Press to toggle the Beat Cancel
[B.C.]
function ON and OFF.
Press to select Noise Reduction 1,
[N.R.]
Noise Reduction 2, or OFF.
Press to toggle between ANT1 and
[FUNC], [AT]
ANT2 for HF/ 50 MHz band.
[FUNC],
Press to toggle the Noise Blanker
[7/ NB/ LEVEL] function ON or OFF.
[FUNC], [ ] Switch the Transporter power OFF.
MAIN control
87
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
These keys and controls are available on the
Commander to control the Transporter.
Note:
◆ When the synconize operation is incomplete, the main display
of the Commander may disappear. In this case, press [SUB] to
re-syncronze.
◆ You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using [ENT]
and the numeric keys. To recall memory channels 100 ~ 299,
use [+]/ [–].
◆ You can recall only the memory channels that have HF/ 50 MHz
frequencies.
◆ Do not use VHF/ UHF frequencies that are suffering from the
harmonics of HF/ 50 MHz transmissions.
◆ The frequency control operations, such as the Tuning control
and RIT/ XIT control, are much slower than using direct controls,
because each control command (in steps of 10 Hz) is sent as
packet data.
◆ When you change the frequency continuously, using the Tuning
control or the MULTI/ CH control, the last entry of the
Commander frequency is reflected on the HF/ 50 MHz
transceiver.
◆ Since Sky Command II+ requires 2 VHF/ UHF frequencies,
check the operating frequencies carefully to avoid interference
with other parties.
◆ When the transceiver exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the
internal TNC retains the data transfer speed in Menu No. 47. If a
different data transfer speed is required for packet operation,
reconfigure it to the desired value.
USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/or TM-D700A
transceivers, you can use one of the transceivers as
a “Transporter”. This transceiver is connected to the
TS-2000(X) via the RS-232C port, EXT SP jack, and
Mic connector of the base station and the other
TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver works as a
“Commander”. With this configuration, you can turn
the TS-2000(X) ON and OFF using the
“Commander”. Refer to the instruction manual of the
TH-D7A or TM-D700A for interfacing the transceiver
to the TS-2000(X) transceiver.
TS-2000 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:
REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)
This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on
one band and retransmitting them on another band.
For example, a signal received on the sub-receiver is
retransmitted on the main transceiver. Similarly, a
signal received on the main transceiver can be
retransmitted on the sub-receiver’s frequency.
You can use any available frequency on the main
transceiver or sub-receiver to receive and transmit.
However, you cannot retransmit the received signals
that are outside the available transmission
frequencies. Additionally, you must use a different
antenna for transmitting and receiving. For example,
if you receive a VHF signal on the sub-receiver, you
can retransmit it using UHF on the main transceiver.
You cannot retransmit the signal using VHF of the
main transceiver.
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels of the
main transceiver and sub-receiver must be adjusted so that no
background noise can be heard.
LOCKED-BAND REPEATER
The transceiver always uses the same band to
receive, and retransmits the received signals on the
other band.
1 Select a desired receive frequency on the subreceiver.
2 Press [MAIN] and select a desired transmit
frequency on the main transceiver.
3 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both
receivers mute.
4 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 61A.
5 Select LOCKED, using [+].
• “
” appears.
1 Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary
cables to the TS-2000.
Note: You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands, so that
you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the subreceiver’s frequency.
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the
main transceiver of the TS-2000.
CROSS-BAND REPEATER
3 On the TS-2000 Press [MENU], then turn the
MULTI/ CH control to access Menu No. 62E.
The cross-band repeater is unlike the lock-band
repeater in that both bands can be used to receive
signals. When a signal is received on one band, it is
retransmitted on the other band. To activate the
cross-band repeater, select CROSS in Menu No. 61A
in step 5.
4 Select a “CLIENT”.
5 Press [MENU] to complete.
6 Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or
TM-D700A.
TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:
Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a
“Commander”. Refer to the SKY COMMAND II
chapter in the instruction manual to set up the
transceiver as a “Commander”.
You can use a “Commander” as described on
pages 84 and 86.
88
Note:
◆ The Repeater function has its own Time-out Timer which is set at
3 minutes. This value cannot be changed.
◆ After activating the Repeater function, you cannot access Menu
Nos. other than 61A and 61B.
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION
If necessary, you can cause this transceiver to remain
in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop.
Access Menu No. 61B and select “ON”.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL)
The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a
voice message on up to 3 channels. After recording
a message via your transceiver microphone, you can
then send that message.
The maximum recording time for each channel is as
follows:
Channel 1: Approx. 30 seconds
Channel 2: Approx. 15 seconds
Channel 3: Approx. 15 seconds
The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:
• DX chasing or contest operation where repeated
calls are necessary for extended periods of time.
• Checking interference complaints with other
equipment (lets you be in two places at one time).
• Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your
antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in
front of your microphone.
• Helping a friend adjust his/her antenna or receive
when he/she needs repeated test transmissions.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on
another channel.
Note: Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels recording in progress and
clears the memory channel.
MESSAGE PLAYBACK
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3
to check or to send. It is also possible to make a
longer message, by consecutively playing back the
messages of more than one channel, linking them
together.
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked
message by using the Repeat function. To switch this
function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON
(Default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval
time in Menu No. 29B (Default is 10 seconds).
Note:
◆ Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels playback in progress.
◆ The settings in Menu Nos. 29A and No. 29B are shared with CW
Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”
{page 43}.
■ Checking Messages
For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit,
refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
RECORDING MESSAGES
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch
the function OFF.
This section explains how to record a single
message.
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to check.
• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and “AP 1– –”
appear while playing back the message in
channel 1.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the
function OFF.
3 Press [FUNC], [1/ CH1/REC] to record the
message for channel 1.
• “¡|| REC WAIT” and “AP1 –” appear.
•
To exit the Record Standby mode and quit
recording your message, press [CLR].
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
4 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first
message is being played.
• Up to three channels can be queued.
4 Press and hold [1/ CH1/REC], then begin
speaking into your microphone.
• Three channels are available for recording
messages. Press channel key [2/ CH2/REC]
or [3/ CH3/REC] in place of [1/ CH1/REC], in
step 3, to record the message on a different
channel.
5 Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have
finished recording your message.
• Also when the maximum recording time
passes, recording stops.
• The content of the channel is overwritten with
the new message.
89
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
■ Sending Messages
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch VOX ON or
OFF.
• If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.
3 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
4 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to use.
• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and “AP 1– –”
appear while playing back the message in
channel 1.
•
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
5 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first
message is being played.
• Up to 3 channels can be queued.
6 If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,
press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
■ Erasing a Recorded Message
1 Press [FUNC] then [1/ CH1/REC] or
[2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] to select the
message which you want to erase.
• “¡|| REC WAIT” and “APn –” appear, where
“n” represents the channel number.
2 To erase the recorded message, press and
hold the same key as in step 1 ([1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]), and press
[CLR] at the same time.
• A beep sounds and the message is erased.
■ Changing Inter-message Interval Time
For repetitive message playback, you can change
the interval between each series of messages.
Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the
range of 0 to 60 seconds.
■ Changing Playback Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not
change the volume for playback. To change the
volume, access Menu No. 14 to select the
playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9.
90
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)
Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function.
Each time you change the transceiver mode such
as VFO A/B or Memory Recall, the transceiver
automatically announces the new mode. In
addition, you can program the front panel [PF] key
so that pressing it makes the transceiver announce
the displayed information. If you have the optional
MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the
Mic [PF] keys for this function as well.
For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit,
refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.
The table below indicates what the transceiver
automatically announces when it changes the settings.
Key Pressed
Operation
Announcement
VFO A
[A/B]
VFO B
VFO + frequency
[+], [–]
Band change
[CALL]
Call channel
Call + frequency
[VFO/ M]
VFO or
Memory
Recall
VFO + frequency
or
MR + Memory No.
+ frequency
[MENU]/
[+], [–]
Menu No.
selection
Menu + No. +
Selected number/
parameter
[M.IN]
Memory
Scroll mode
MR + Channel +
Memory No. (3-digit)
+ Frequency
Frequency
entry
Enter
Menu No.
changes
Menu + No. +
Selected number/
parameter
Memory
channel No.
changes
MR + Memory
channel No. +
frequency
Numeric key
entry
Entering
numbers
Every number
entered
[•]
During the
frequency
entry
Mega hertz
[ENT]
MULTI/ CH
control
Note: The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the
number shown below.
Menu number
66 DSP MONI
70 TF-SET
74
SCAN
78
CH1
82
CLR
86 ANT1/2
90
A.N.
63 VOICE1
67 QUICK MR
71
A/B
75 M>VFO
79
CH2
83
CALL
87
NB
99
OFF
64 VOICE2
68 QUICK M.IN
72 VFO/ M
76
M.IN
80
CH3
84
CTRL
88
N.R.
65 RX MONI
69
SPLIT
73
A=B
77 CW TUNE
81
FINE
85
1MHz
89
B.C.
For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce
different information, depending on whether VOICE1
or VOICE2 is selected.
VOICE1:
• VFO or memory channel frequencies are
announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and
continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. If the
memory channel has no data stored, “open” is
announced. For the MHz decimal point, “point” is
announced. For the kHz decimal point, a short
pause (200 ms) is made. A 200 ms pause is also
made between the channel number and the
frequency.
• Menu numbers and their settings are announced
with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu
number and the setting.
Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the
display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement is
interrupted.
VOICE2:
• The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the
key, are announced, for example, “S5” or “20 dB”.
The table below shows the available announcements
when the [PF] (VOICE2) is pressed.
MAIN
SUB
S-Meter
Level
Announcement
S-Meter
Level
Announcement
1~3
S1
1
S1
4
S2
2
S2
5~6
S3
3
S3
7
S4
4
S4
8~9
S5
5
S5
10
S6
6
S6
11 ~ 12
S7
7
S7
13
S8
8
S8
14 ~ 15
S9
9
S9
16 ~ 18
10 dB
10
10 dB
19 ~ 20
20 dB
11
20 dB
21 ~ 22
30 dB
12
30 dB
23 ~ 25
40 dB
13
40 dB
26 ~ 28
50 dB
14
50 dB
29 ~ 30
60 dB
15
60 dB
1 Assign VOICE1 (63) or VOICE2 (64) to the front
panel [PF] key by accessing Menu No. 51A. Or, if
you are using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM
microphone, assign one of the Mic [PF] keys to
either VOICE1 or VOICE2. For programming Mic
[PF] keys, refer to “MICROPHONE PF KEYS”
{page 77}.
2 Press the [PF] key that you programmed.
• An announcement is made based on the
VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection.
• To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]
key again.
91
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
MICROPROCESSOR RESET
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,
resetting the microprocessor default settings may
resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting
the microprocessor of the TS-2000(X): partial reset
and full reset.
INITIAL SETTINGS
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating
frequency and mode are as follows:
• MAIN VFO A: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
• MAIN VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
• SUB VFO:
144.000.00 MHz/ FM
The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels
have no data stored.
PARTIAL RESET
Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not
function according to the instructions in this manual.
The following data is NOT erased by performing a
Partial Reset.
• Memory channel data
• Menu settings
• Antenna tuner preset data
• ANT 1/ANT 2 data
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B]+[ ].
• A confirmatin message appears. Press [A/B] to
proceed. Otherwise, press any other key to
cancel the Partial Reset and return to normal
operation.
• “HELLO” appears on the display and the VFOs
resets to the factory default values.
FULL RESET
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data
in all the memory channels. In addition, this function
resets all the settings that you customized, to the
factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner
preset data, etc.).
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A=B]+[
].
A confirmation message appears when performing
the Full Reset. Press [A=B] to proceed. Otherwise,
press any other key to cancel the Full Reset and
return to normal operation.
When you perform the full reset:
• “HELLO” appears on the display.
• All frequencies, modes, memory data and AT
preset data are set to the factory default values
(refer to “INITIAL SETTINGS”, above).
92
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER
The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable
terminated with a 9-pin female connector.
No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver. See “APPENDIX”
{page 113} for information related to this connector.
TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000
RS-232C
serial port
COM connector
Personal computer/
dumb terminal
Straight cable
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER
When transferring data to or from another TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S, directly connect the two transceivers
using the COM connectors.
When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers, use the optional IF-232C interface unit. Connect the
IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver.
TS-2000(X)/870S/570
TS-2000(X)
Cross-wired cable
COM Connector
cable
TS-450S/690S/850S/950SDX
TS-2000(X)
See IF-232C manual.
DIN(6P)
ANT
IF-232C
RS-232C(25P)
DIN(6P)
Cross-wired cable
Straight cable
93
16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
RTTY EQUIPMENT
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the
ACC 2 connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector
{page 95}.
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the
transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.
MCP
power
supply
TS-2000(X)
MCP
ACC 2
Personal computer/
dumb terminal
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER
Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector (1 male REMOTE connector
(E07-0751-XX) is supplied). Switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No. 28A.
The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have
selected CW Semi Break-in.
Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is
grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the connector to
the control terminal of the amplifier.
REMOTE connector
TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000
Linear amplifier
Pin
No.
1
2
3
AC LINE
Control relay
4
2
5
1
3
6
7
REMOTE Connector
(Rear panel view)
Speaker output
Common terminal
Standby; when grounded, the
transceiver enters TX mode.
4
When connected with the common
terminal, the amplifier enters TX mode.
5
When connected with the common
terminal, the amplifier enters RX mode.
6
7
ALC input from amplifier
Approx. +12 V DC is output when in
TX mode (10 mA max.).
RF OUTPUT
R
T
Function
GND
ANTENNA TUNER
Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an external antenna tuner. If you connect the external tuner to the
ANT 2 connector, the external tuner will not function.
Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000, you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit. Connect your 6 m band
antenna to the ANT 2 connector.
External antenna tuner
The AT-300 external antenna tuner is a
discontinued model. It may no longer be
available in your area.
TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000
94
16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
MCP AND TNC
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet
operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR, G-TORTM ,
PSK31, or FAX, or from a Clover interface. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch
equipment (1 male ACC2 connector (E07-1351-XX) is supplied).
• Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.
• Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the
transceiver and the computer to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.
13
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Pin No.
ACC2
Front view
(Rear panel)
Pin
Name
Function
1
AF output from the sub-receiver
• Connect to the TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation.
SANO • AF output level is independent from SUB AF control setting.
• AF output level can be changed by adjusting the Menu No. 50D value.
• Output impedance: Approx. 10kΩ.
2
RTTY
3
AF output from the main transceiver
• Connect to the TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation.
MANO • AF output level is independent from the MAIN AF control setting.
• AF output level can be changed by adjusting the Menu No. 50C value.
• Output impedance: Approx. 10kΩ.
4
RTTY key input
GND
Ground
5
MSQ
Main transceiver squelch control
• Connect to the TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital operation.
• Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the transceiver squelch is open.
• Squelch open: Low impedance
• Squelch closed: High impedance
6
NC
No connection
7
SSQ
Sub-receiver squelch control
• Connect to the TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital operation.
• Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the transceiver squelch is open.
• Squelch open: Low impedance
• Squelch closed: High impedance
8
GND
Ground
9
PKS
Transceiver PTT line control
• Ground this terminal to transmit.
• Connect to the TNC or MCP transmit/ receive switching pin for digital operation.
• Microphone audio input mutes when the transceiver transmits.
10
NC
No connection
11
PKD
Microphone audio input
• Connect to the TNC or MCP transmit data pin for digital operation.
12
GND
Ground
13
SS
PTT control
• Ground this terminal to transmit.
• For connecting a footswitch or other external controller (in parallel with MIC jack).
• Microphone audio input does NOT mute when the transceiver transmits.
95
16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
TYPICAL MCP/ TNC SETUP
Black
Power supply for
TNC/ MCP
Red
TS-2000
TS-2000X
TS-2000B
TNC/MCP
PS-53
Power supply
for TS-2000(X)/
TS-B2000
Personal computer
LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, VHF, UHF and 1.2 GHz)
Connect an external 50 MHz/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz power amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector
(1 male EXT.CONT connector (E07-0851-XX) is supplied). The TX/RX switching time can be configured
independently for each band, accessing Menu Nos. 28B ~ 28E. Select 1 for 10 ms delay or 2 for 25 ms delay.
However, when CW Full Break-in is enabled, 10 ms switching delay is applied automatically regardless of the
settings. You can also disable the EXT.CONT control, selecting OFF (default).
Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Most amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control
terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers, connect the metal cover of the EXT.CONT connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and
connect pin 2 (50 MHz), pin 6 (144 MHz), pin 1 (430/ 440 MHz), or pin 4 (1.2 GHz) of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier.
w
t
r
q y e
i
u
EXT.CONT connector
EXT.CONT
Front view
(Rear panel)
Pin No.
C
Grounded when the transceiver
43TXC transmits on the 430/ 440 MHz
band. (DC 20 V, 20 mA max.)
2
Grounded when the transceiver
50TXC transmits on the 50 MHz band.
(DC 20 V, 20 mA max.)
TXC
(20 V DC, 20 mA max.)
B
3
E
4
Circuit of ALC inputs (pin 3, 5, 7, and 8)
5
pin 3
pin 5
6
ALC
96
50 MHz ALC input from amplifier
(–7 V).
Grounded when the transceiver
12TXC transmits on the 1.2 GHz band.
(DC 20 V, 20 mA max.)
ALC
430 (440) MHz ALC input from
amplifier (–7 V).
Grounded when the transceiver
14TXB transmits on the 144 MHz band.
(DC 20 V, 20 mA max.)
pin 7
pin 8
Function
1
GND
Circuit of each TXC (pin 1, 2, 4, and 6)
Pin
Name
7
ALC
1.2 GHz ALC input from amplifier
(–7 V).
8
ALC
144 MHz ALC input from
amplifier (–7 V).
Metal
cover
GND
Ground
INSTALLING OPTIONS
You will require a Phillips screwdriver when installing
the optional units.
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT
SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER
CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
When installing the optional DRU-3A or VS-3 unit,
remove the bottom case first.
1 Remove the bottom case (10 screws).
1 Remove the 10 screws.
2 Locate the VS-3 jack.
3 Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing
up, and insert the VS-3 connector into the VS-3
jack.
2 Lift off the bottom case.
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER
CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1 Remove the bottom case (10 screws).
4 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).
Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VS-3 playback volume
by selecting Menu No. 15.
2 Locate the DRU-3A connector.
3 Peel off the paper on the cushion attached to the
PC board of the transceiver.
Cushion
4 Plug the DRU-3A into the DRU-3A connector of
the PC board.
5 Press the top of the DRU-3A to affix it to the
cushion.
DRU-3A
6 Replace the bottom case (10 screws).
Note: After the installation, you can adjust the DRU-3A playback
volume by selecting Menu No. 14.
97
17 INSTALLING OPTIONS
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET
RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL
When installing the MB-430, attach the supplied
plastic spacers (G11-2698-XX) to the transceiver in
advance. This is necessary to protect the
TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 transceiver from scratches.
Plug the modular cable from the RC-2000 into the
PANEL connector on the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 rear
panel. Access Menu Nos. 58 ~ 60 to adjust the panel
configuration if necessary.
G11-2698-XX
Make sure the tab faces out
Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle,
prepare the transceiver by loosely screwing in the
rear screws. Hook those screws onto the rear guide
rail of the mounting bracket then adjust the
transceiver to your desired angle before tightening
the screws. Insert and tighten the front screws to
secure the transceiver in place.
Rear screw
Rear screw
Front screw
Front screw
To remove the transceiver from the bracket, first
remove the front screws, then loosen the rear screws
slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it
from the bracket.
Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically on its side.
98
TS-2000/ TS-2000X
TS-B2000
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested
to specification before shipment. Under normal
circumstances, the transceiver will operate in
accordance with these operating instructions. All
adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the
transceiver were preset at the factory. They should
only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is
familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary
test equipment. Attempting service or alignment
without factory authorization can void the transceiver
warranty.
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide
years of service and enjoyment without requiring
further realignment. The information in this section
gives some general service procedures requiring little
or no test equipment.
Note:
◆ Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer from
whom the transceiver was purchased.
◆ For your own information, retain a written record of any
maintenance performed on the transceiver.
◆ When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy of
the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date of
sale.
CLEANING
The keys, controls and case of the transceiver are
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove
the controls from the transceiver and clean them with
a neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral
detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to
clean the case.
LITHIUM BATTERY
SERVICE
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your
dealer or service center for repair, pack the
transceiver in its original box and packing material.
Include a full description of the problems
experienced. Include both your telephone number
and fax number (if available) along with your name
and address in case the service technician needs to
call for further explanation while investigating your
problem. Don’t return accessory items unless you
feel they are directly related to the service problem.
You may return your transceiver for service to the
authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you
purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service
center. A copy of the service report will be returned
with the transceiver. Please do not send
subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send the
complete transceiver.
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign
for identification. Please mention the model and
serial number of the transceiver in any
communication regarding the problem.
SERVICE NOTE
If you desire to correspond on a technical or
operational problem, please make your note short,
complete, and to the point. Help us help you by
providing the following:
1 Model and serial number of equipment.
2 Question or problem you are having.
3 Other equipment in your station pertaining to the
problem.
4 Meter readings.
5 Other related information (Menu setup, mode,
frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,
etc.).
This transceiver uses an EEPROM to store memory
channel data, menu configurations and all necessary
operation parameters. So, you never have to worry
about replacing batteries to operate the transceiver.
However, the transceiver’s built-in TNC requires a
lithium battery (CR-2032) to store the TNC data.
Battery lifetime varies, but under normal operating
conditions, it should last for approximately 5 years.
If you find that the TNC no longer stores the TNC
parameters, contact an authorized KENWOOD
service center for replacing the lithium battery.
DEMONSTRATION MODE
The transceiver can be configured to enter the
demonstration mode for display purposes. To enter
the demonstration mode:
1 Switch the transceiver OFF.
2 Press [FUNC]+[ ] to switch the transceiver ON.
• On the dot-matrix display windows, you will see
a few killer whales jump across the display.
You will also notice the display brightness
changes and LEDs turn ON and OFF
automatically.
• If you operate the transceiver while in the
demonstration mode, the demonstration is
temporarily paused. But, if no operation is
performed for more than 10 seconds, the
demonstration starts again.
3 To exit the demonstration mode, first turn the
transceiver OFF, then press [FUNC]+[ ] to turn
the transceiver ON.
Note: You cannot exit the demonstration mode by simply switching
the transceiver OFF or performing a full reset {page 92}. You must
switch the transceiver OFF then press [FUNC]+[
] to turn the
transceiver ON in order to exit the demonstration mode.
DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED
NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.
99
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of
difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to
incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table, and
the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual, before assuming your transceiver is defective.
Note: Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver.
Problem
The transceiver will not
power up after
connecting a 13.8 V DC
power supply and
pressing [ ]. Nothing
appears on the display,
and no receiver noise is
heard.
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
1 DC power supply is OFF.
2 Faulty power cable.
1 Switch ON the DC power supply.
2 Inspect the power cable. Confirm
polarities are correct.
Red: positive (+); Black: negative (–)
3 The power cable is not connected 3 Confirm the connections to the DC
securely.
power supply are secure.
4 Power cable fuse is open.
4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse.
After inspecting and correcting any
problems, install a new fuse of the
specified rating.
After switching ON the 1 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V 1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to
power, the transceiver
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
16 V battery.
does not function
normally. For example, 2 The microprocessor has
2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR
no digits or incorrect
malfunctioned.
RESET”. After understanding what
digits appear on the
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset. If
display.
the problem remains, do a Full Reset.
Page
Ref.
2
2
2
2
2
92
After switching ON the The internal TNC backup lithium
transceiver, the internal battery voltage is too low.
TNC resets to the
factory default values.
Have a new battery installed by your
dealer or at a KENWOOD Service Center.
99
The transceiver does
1 Procedures are not being
not respond correctly
followed precisely.
after pressing key
2 The Frequency Lock function is
combinations or turning
ON.
controls per instructions 3 The microprocessor and its
in this manual.
memory need resetting.
1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS
FOLLOWED”.
2 Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to
switch the function OFF.
3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR
RESET”. After understanding what
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset. If
the problem remains, do a Full Reset.
4 Stop operating the Tuning control, then
press the appropriate keys.
i
4 The keys on the transceiver are
unavailable while operating the
Tuning control.
The frequency cannot
be changed.
SSB audio quality is
very poor; the high or
low audio frequencies
are absent.
The Frequency Lock function or
Lock All function is ON.
1 The wrong operation mode is
selected for the receiver.
2 The LO/ WIDTH control or
HI/ SHIFT control is incorrectly
set.
3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is ON.
4 Beat Cancel is ON.
100
77
92
–
Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch
the function OFF.
Or press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to
switch the function OFF.
77
1 Select USB or LSB for the mode.
28
2 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control
counterclockwise and the HI/ SHIFT
control clockwise.
3 Press [N.R./ LEVEL] to switch the
function OFF.
4 Press [B.C./ MANUAL] to switch the
function OFF.
55
77
56
56
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
No signals are
received or receive
sensitivity seems
poor.
Probable Cause
1 The SQL control is fully clockwise.
2 The Attenuator function is ON.
3 [SEND] was pressed, and the
transceiver is now in transmit mode.
Or, Mic [PTT] is pressed.
4 The receive bandwidth was
incorrectly set.
5 The wrong antenna connector
(ANT 1 or ANT 2) was selected.
6 The receive preamplifier is OFF.
Corrective Action
Page
Ref.
1 Turn the SQL control counterclockwise.
2 Press [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch the
function OFF.
3 Press [SEND] to return to receive
mode. Or release Mic [PTT].
19
57
4 Review “DSP FILTERS” and
“CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER
BANDWIDTH”, and set the controls
accordingly.
5 Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select
the other antenna connector.
6 Press [PRE/ LOCK A] to switch the
function ON.
55
–
72
57
No signals are
received or receive
sensitivity seems
poor; S-meter is
reading full scale.
The RF control was set too low.
Turn the MAIN RF GAIN control fully
clockwise.
18
Received signals
are totally
unintelligible.
The wrong modulation mode was
selected.
Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO],
[CW/ FSK/ REV], or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to
select the correct modulation mode.
19
Memory Scan will
not start scanning.
1 The SQL control was not set
correctly.
2 Less than two memory channels
were unlocked.
3 Less than two memory channels
were programmed.
4 The SQL control was not set
correctly.
1 Adjust the SQL controls to just
eliminate background noise.
2 Unlock at least two memory channels.
3 Store data in at least two memory
channels.
4 Adjust the SQL controls.
19,46
68
68
19,46
Memory Scan will
With Group Scan selected, the channel Select the group that contains the memory
not scan one of the you want to scan is in a different group. channel you want to scan.
stored channels; the
desired channel is
NOT locked out.
69
Program Scan will
not start scanning.
The start and end frequencies are
identical.
62
Tuning does not
finish successfully.
The impedance of the coaxial cable and Adjust the antenna system to lower the
antenna was not matched.
SWR.
Tuning does not successfully finish
depending on conditions although the
SWR meter indicates smaller than 3:1.
Store different start and end frequencies.
1
The internal tuner is The SWR of the antenna system is too
bypassed
high.
immediately after
tuning is started.
Adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR.
1
You cannot transmit 1 The microphone plug was not
even though you
inserted completely into the MIC
press Mic [PTT] or
connector.
transmissions result 2 The Transmit Inhibit function is ON.
in no contacts.
3 CW or FSK was selected instead of
a voice mode.
4 The DSP TX filter bandwidth was
inproperly selected.
5 The wrong antenna connector
(ANT 1 or ANT 2) was selected.
1 Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC
connector has no foreign objects in it,
then plug in the connector firmly.
2 Change Menu No. 54 to OFF.
3 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or
[FM/ AM/ NAR] to select a voice mode.
4 Adjust the settings in Menu No. 22.
3
5 Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select
the other antenna connector.
41
19
41
72
101
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Page
Ref.
Attempting to
1 The antenna is not connected
transmit results in
correctly.
the “HELLO”
2 The impedances of the antenna and
message appearing
transceiver are not properly
and the receive
matched.
mode being
3 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V
restored.
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
4 The current rating of the DC power
supply is not enough.
1 Check the antenna connection.
Correct as necessary.
2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna
system.
72
3 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to
16 V battery.
4 Use a DC power supply that has a
current rating of more than 20.5 A at
13.8 V DC.
2
The transceiver has
low transmit power.
1 When in SSB or AM mode, increase
the microphone gain.
2 Check the antenna connections.
Confirm that the antenna tuner is
reporting a low SWR.
20
1 The microphone gain is set too low.
2 Poor antenna system connections
are causing high SWR.
1
2
72
VOX does not
operate.
The VOX gain is set too low.
Increase the VOX gain.
39
HF Linear amplifier
does not operate.
1 The linear amplifier control relay is
OFF.
2 The REMOTE connector wiring is
wrong or faulty.
1 Change Menu No. 28A to ON.
76
2 Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring
and correct as necessary.
94
50 MHz, 144 MHz,
430/ 440 MHz or
1.2 GHz linear
amplifier does not
operate.
1 The linear amplifier control is OFF.
2 The linear amplifier control cable is
connected to the REMOTE
connector.
3 The EXT.CONT connector wiring is
wrong or faulty.
1 Change Menu Nos. 28B ~ 28E to ON.
2 Connect the cable to the EXT.CONT
connector.
76
96
3 Inspect the EXT.CONT connector
wiring and correct as necessary.
96
You cannot access
and use repeaters.
1 Many repeaters require a subtone or 1 Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION”
1750 Hz tone to access.
and select the correct frequency and
type of subtone.
2 Shift direction or shift frequency is
2 You must transmit on the repeater’s
wrong.
input frequency and receive on the
repeater’s output frequency. Refer to
“FM REPEATER OPERATION”.
32
32
Digital operation
1 Physical connections between the
results in few or no
transceiver, computer, and
connects or contacts
TNC/MCP is incorrect, or software
with other stations.
settings in the TNC/MCP are wrong.
2 Different transmit and receive
frequencies are being used.
1 Re-check all connections using this
94,95
manual, your TNC/MCP manual, and
your computer hardware manual as
references.
2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions 38,40
are switched OFF. Confirm that you
are NOT operating split frequency.
3 The levels between the transceiver
3 Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu
50
and the TNC/MCP are incorrect.
Nos. 50B ~ 50D, and level controls on
your TNC/MCP.
4 Your transmitted signal or the
4 Reorient/relocate your antenna or
–
incoming receive signal is too weak.
increase your antenna gain.
5 The TX delay time parameter in your 5 Set the TNC/MCP TX delay time to
–
TNC/MCP was incorrectly set.
more than 300 ms.
Attempts at
controlling the
transceiver with the
computer have
failed.
102
1 Problem with the cable that connects 1 Check the cable and cable
the PC to the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000.
connections.
2 Communication parameters set in your 2 Use the same parameters in the
terminal program do not match
terminal program and the transceiver.
transceiver parameters.
Check the Menu No. 56.
93
81
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
OPERATION NOTICES
VISUAL SCAN
The TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 has been designed and
engineered to avoid possible hardware glitches.
However, you may notice the following symptoms
when you operate the transceiver. These symptoms
are not malfunctions.
When you have the same VHF band or UHF band
for both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver,
the Visual scan may indicate the signals on the
bar-graph display even if no signal is monitored on
the main transceiver. This error occurs due to the
internal spurious harmonics that are generated by
the sub-receiver. Refer to “INTERNAL BEATS”,
above, for the frequencies.
DC POWER SUPPLY
As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS {page 105}, this
transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of
13.8 V ±15%. If you find that the transceiver cannot
be switched ON, or that is shut OFF automatically,
the DC voltage may be outside the specified range.
In such a case, remove the DC cable from the
transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied
voltage is within the specified range.
TX SIGNAL HARMONICS
The TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 has 2 independent
receivers. Thus, it can receive signals while you are
transmitting. Because of this, the harmonics or the
mixed heterodyne signal images of your transmission
signal can be monitored through the receiver. Even if
the TX Monitor function {page 79} is OFF, the
transmission signal may be monitored through the
speaker.
SENSITIVITY (K-type only)
While the main transceiver is receiving on the VHF band
(142 ~ 152 MHz), the sensitivity of the main transceiver
slightly degrades when you select 118 ~ 136 MHz or
155 ~ 300 MHz for the sub-receiver.
AGC
When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 38}, the
receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,
decrease the RF GAIN, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or
turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF GAIN is
greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF.
SUB-RECEIVER
When you turn the sub-receiver ON or OFF, a
popping noise may be monitored from the speaker.
INTERNAL BEATS
On some spots of the transceiver bands, the S-meter
moves or you cannot receive any signals. This is
inevitable when you use superheterodyne receivers.
You may notice the signals on the following spots of
the bands.
On the main transceiver:
51.259 MHz, 430.151 MHz, 432.209 MHz,
436.799 MHz, 439.298 MHz, 442.440 MHz
(K-type only), 1247.999 MHz, and 1269.387 MHz.
When the sub-receiver frequency is 144.000 MHz:
146.663 MHz (K-type only) and 436.249 MHz.
When the sub-receiver frequency is 440.000 MHz:
437.333 MHz and 444.315 MHz (K-type only).
Note: When the sub-receiver frequency changes, the above beat
frequencies may be changed accordingly. In this case, turn the
sub-receiver OFF to remove the internal spurious signals.
On the sub-receiver:
144.490 MHz, 144.945 MHz, 430.150 MHz,
436.210 MHz, 436.800 MHz, 442.020 MHz
(K-type only), 449.400 MHz (K-type only) and
429.050 MHz (K-type only).
103
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
ARCP-2000
DRU-3A
HS-5
HS-6
Advanced Radio Control
Program
Digital Recording Unit
Deluxe Headphones
Small Headphones
LF-30A
MB-430
MC-43S
MC-47
Low-pass Filter
Mobile Mounting Bracket
Hand Microphone
Multi-function Microphone
This option is supplied with the TS-B2000.
See page 98 for the installation.
MC-52DM
MC-60A
MC-80
MC-90
DTMF Microphone
Deluxe Desktop
Microphone
Desktop Microphone
DSP-compatible Desktop
Microphone
Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode.
PG-2Z
PS-53
RC-2000
SP-23
DC Cable
Regulated DC Power
Supply (22.5 A)
Mobile Controller
External Speaker
SP-50B
UT-20
VS-3
Mobile Speaker
1.2 GHz TX/ RX unit
Voice Synthesizer Unit
Service center installation only. Contact
an authorized dealer for details.
104
SPECIFICATIONS
TS-2000
TS-B2000
General
TS-2000X
Mode
J3E (LSB, USB)/ A1A (CW)/ A3E (AM)/ F3E (FM)/
F1D (FSK)/ F2D (F2D)
Number of memory channels
300
Antenna impedance
50Ω (with Antenna Tuner 16.7 ~ 150Ω )
Supply Voltage
DC 13.8 V ±15%
Grounding method
Negative ground
Transmit (max.)
20.5 A or less
Receive (no signal)
2.6 A or less
Current
–10°C ~ 50°C (+14°F ~ 122°F)
Usable temperature range
Frequency stability (–10°C ~ 50°C)
Main
FM TX mode within ±0.5 x 10–6 ±2 kHz
Other mode within ±0.5 x 10–6 (±0.5 ppm)
Sub
Within ±0.5 x 10–6 ±600 Hz
Frequency accuracy (at room temperature)
Within ±0.5 ppm
Dimensions (W x H x D Projections included)
281 x 107 x 371 mm/ 11.06" x 4.21" x 14.61"
(TS-2000/ TS-2000X)
281 x 107 x 344.5 mm/ 11.06" x 4.21" x 13.56"
(TS-B2000)
Weight
Approx. 7.8 kg/ 17.2 lb
(TS-2000)
Approx. 7.5 kg/ 16.6 lb
(TS-B2000)
TS-2000
TS-B2000
Transmitter
Frequency range
Approx. 8.2 kg/ 18.1 lb
TS-2000X
160 m band
1.8 ~ 2.0 MHz (K-type)
1.81 ~ 2.0 MHz (E-type)
1.83 ~ 1.85 MHz (E2-type)
1.8 ~ 2.0 MHz
80 m band
3.5 ~ 4.0 MHz (K-type)
3.5 ~ 3.8 MHz (All E-types)
3.5 ~ 4.0 MHz
40 m band
7.0 ~ 7.3 MHz (K-type)
7.0 ~ 7.1 MHz (All E-types)
7.0 ~ 7.3 MHz
30 m band
10.1 ~ 10.15 MHz
20 m band
14.0 ~ 14.35 MHz
17 m band
18.068 ~ 18.168 MHz
15 m band
21.0 ~ 21.45 MHz
12 m band
24.89 ~ 24.99 MHz
10 m band
28.0 ~ 29.7 MHz
6 m band
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz (K-type)
50.0 ~ 52.0 MHz (E-type)
50.0 ~ 50.2 MHz (E2-type)
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz
2 m band
144 ~ 148 MHz (K-type)
144 ~ 146 MHz (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz
70 cm band
430 ~ 450 MHz (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz
23 cm band
1240 ~ 1300 MHz
(w/ UT-20)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz
105
20 SPECIFICATIONS
TS-2000
TS-B2000
Transmitter
Max.
100 W (160 m ~ 2 m band)/ 50 W (70 cm band)/
10 W (23 cm band)
Min.
5 W (160 m ~ 2 m band)/ 5 W (70 cm band)/
1 W (23 cm band)
Max.
25 W (160 m ~ 2 m band)/ 12.5 W (70 cm band)/
2.5 W (23 cm band)
Min.
5 W (160 m ~ 2 m band)/ 5 W (70 cm band)/
1 W (23 cm band)
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ FM
Output power
AM
Modulation
Spurious emissions
SSB
Balanced
FM
Reactance
AM
Low level
160 m ~ 10 m band
–50 dB or less
6 m ~ 70 cm band
–60 dB or less
23 cm band
–50 dB or less
Carrier suppression (SSB)
50 dB or more
Unwanted sideband suppression
(modulation frequency 1.0 kHz)
50 dB or more
Wide
Maximum frequency
deviation (FM)
Narrow
±5 kHz or less
±2.5 kHz or less
XIT shift frequency range
±20.0 kHz
Microphone impedance
600Ω
TS-2000
TS-B2000
Receiver
Main tranceiver
Circuit type
Sub-receiver
Intermediate
Frequency (IF)
Sub-receiver
118 ~ 174 MHz (K-type)
144 ~ 146 MHz (All E-types)
220 ~ 512 MHz (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz (All E-types)
Sub-receiver
106
FM/ AM: Double conversion superheterodyne
Main transceiver
Main transceiver
TS-2000X
SSB/ CW/ AM/ FSK: Quadruple conv. superheterodyne
FM: Triple conversion superheterodyne
0.03 ~ 60.0 MHz (All types)
142 ~ 152 MHz (K-type)
144 ~ 146 MHz (All E-types)
420 ~ 450 MHz (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz (All E-types)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz (w/ UT-20)
Frequency range
TS-2000X
0.03 ~ 60.0 MHz
142 ~ 152 MHz
420 ~ 450 MHz
1240 ~ 1300 MHz
118 ~ 174 MHz
220 ~ 512 MHz
1st IF
0.03 ~ 60 MHz: 69.085 MHz or 75.925 MHz
118 ~ 512 MHz: 41.895 MHz
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: 135.495 MHz
2nd IF: 10.695 MHz
3rd IF: 455 kHz
4th IF: 12.0 kHz
1st IF: 58.525 MHz
2nd IF: 455 kHz
20 SPECIFICATIONS
TS-2000
TS-B2000
Receiver
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 4 µV or less
1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz: 0.2 µV or less
24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.13 µV or less
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.13 µV or less
144 ~ 146 MHz: 0.11 µV or less (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz: 0.16 µV or less (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz: 0.11 µV or less (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz: 0.11 µV or less (K-type)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: 0.11 µV or less (All types)
SSB/ CW/ FSK
(S/N 10 dB)
AM
(S/N 10 dB)
Sensitivity
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 31.6 µV or less
1.705 ~ 24.5 MHz: 2.0 µV or less
24.5 ~ 30.0 MHz: 1.3 µV or less
Main 50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 1.3 µV or less
144 ~ 146 MHz: 1.0 µV or less (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz: 1.4 µV or less (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz: 1.0 µV or less (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz: 1.0 µV or less (K-type)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: 1.0 µV or less (All types)
28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.22 µV or less
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.22 µV or less
144 ~ 146 MHz: 0.18 µV or less (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz: 0.25 µV or less (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz: 0.18 µV or less (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz: 0.18 µV or less (K-type)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: 0.18 µV or less (All types)
FM
(12 dB SINAD)
AM
(S/N 10 dB)
Sub
FM
(12 dB SINAD)
SSB
(Low-cut: 300 Hz/
Hi-cut: 2600 Hz)
Selectivity
AM
(Low-cut: 100 Hz/
Hi-cut: 3000 Hz)
TS-2000X
144 ~ 146 MHz:
144 ~ 148 MHz:
430 ~ 440 MHz:
438 ~ 450 MHz:
1.55 µV or less (All E-types)
2.25 µV or less (K-type)
1.55 µV or less (All E-types)
1.55 µV or less (K-type)
144 ~ 146 MHz:
144 ~ 148 MHz:
430 ~ 440 MHz:
438 ~ 450 MHz:
0.28 µV or less (All E-types)
0.40 µV or less (K-type)
0.28 µV or less (All E-types)
0.28 µV or less (K-type)
–6 dB: 2.2 kHz, –60 dB: 4.4 kHz
Main
–6 dB: 6.0 kHz, –50 dB: 12.0 kHz
FM
–6 dB: 12.0 kHz, –50 dB: 25.0 kHz
AM
–6 dB: 12.0 kHz, –50 dB: 25.0 kHz
Sub
FM
–6 dB: 12.0 kHz, –50 dB: 25.0 kHz
Main transceiver
70 dB or more
Sub-receiver
60 dB or more
Main transceiver
70 dB or more
Sub-receiver
60 dB or more
Image rejection
1st IF rejection
Notch filter attenuation (at 1 kHz)
30 dB or more
Beat cancel attenuation (at 1 kHz)
40 dB or more
RIT shift frequency range
±20.0 kHz
107
20 SPECIFICATIONS
TS-2000
TS-B2000
Receiver
SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM
Squelch sensitivity
FM
0.5 ~ 1.705 MHz: 18.0 µV or less
1.8 ~ 28.7 MHz: 1.8 µV or less
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 1.1 µV or less
144 ~ 146 MHz: 1.1 µV or less (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz: 1.1 µV or less (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz: 1.1 µV or less (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz: 1.1 µV or less (K-type)
1
Main 240 ~ 1300 MHz: 1.1 µV or less (All types)
28.0 ~ 30.0 MHz: 0.2 µV or less
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz: 0.2 µV or less
144 ~ 146 MHz: 0.1 µV or less (All E-types)
144 ~ 148 MHz: 0.16 µV or less (K-type)
430 ~ 440 MHz: 0.1 µV or less (All E-types)
430 ~ 450 MHz: 0.1 µV or less (K-type)
1240 ~ 1300 MHz: 0.1 µV or less (All types)
AM
Sub
FM
144 ~ 146 MHz:
144 ~ 148 MHz:
430 ~ 440 MHz:
438 ~ 450 MHz:
1.1 µV or less (All E-types)
1.1 µV or less (K-type)
1.1 µV or less (All E-types)
1.1 µV or less (K-type)
144 ~ 146 MHz:
144 ~ 148 MHz:
430 ~ 440 MHz:
438 ~ 450 MHz:
0.18 µV or less (All E-types)
0.23 µV or less (K-type)
0.18 µV or less (All E-types)
0.18 µV or less (K-type)
Audio output (8Ω, 10% distortion)
1.5 W or more
Audio output impedance (EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2)
8Ω
108
TS-2000X
APPENDIX
TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL
RESET
5
PHONES
HF/VHF/UHF/ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-B2000
4
MIC
3
DIGITAL
SIGNAL
PROCESSOR
1
q [
2
] (POWER) switch
Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power
ON. Press again to switch the power OFF.
w Power indicator
While the transceiver is turned ON, it lights red.
e MIC connector
Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,
then securely screw down the connector locking ring
{page 3}.
r PHONES jack
Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a
plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from
the speaker {page 3}.
t RESET button
Push this switch to reset the microprocessor in the
transceiver. This sets all the contents of the memory
function to the factory default values.
109
21 APPENDIX
BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST
All descriptions in this section are for the users convenience only. KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this
documentation in any way. The built-in TNC does not support the digipeater functions due to the RAM capacity.
Command
Name
Short
Default
Parameter
AUTOLF
AU
ON
ON/ OFF
AWLEN
AW
8
7/ 8
EVERY/
AFTER n
(n = 0 ~
250)
Description
When ON, sends a line feed (LF) to the computer after
each carriage return (CR).
Sets the length of bits between TNC and its host.
If set to EVERY, sends a beacon packet at intervals of the
specified period (n). If set to AFTER, sends a beacon
packet only once after the specified period (n). The unit of
n is 10 seconds.
BEACON
B
EVERY 0
BTEXT
BT
—
CALIBRA
CAL
—
—
Sends a space/mark square wave (50/50 ratio). Enter Q to
exit Calibrate mode and restore the Command mode.
CHECK
CH
30
0 ~ 250
Specifies the interval from signal drop-out until execution of
disconnection. The unit of the parameter is 10 seconds.
CONNECT
C
—
CONVERSE
CONV or K
—
—
CPACTIME
CP
OFF
ON/ OFF
When ON and in Converse mode, sends a packet at
intervals of the period determined by PACTIME.
CR
CR
ON
ON/ OFF
When ON, appends a carriage return (CR) to all packets to
be sent.
DISCONNE
D
—
—
0 ~ 159 Specifies the content of the data portion of a beacon
characters packet.
Call1 (VIA Sends a connect request. Call1 is the call sign of the
call2, call3, station to be connected to. Call2 to call9 are call signs of
... call9) stations to be digipeated through.
Causes the TNC to enter Converse mode. Press
[Ctrl]+[C] to restore the Command mode.
Sends a disconnect request.
Causes the TNC to display the current status of all the
commands. You can also specify a class identifier A, C, H,
I, L, M, or T to display the status of only the desired
command class. Enter a space between the command
name and a class identifier; ex. DISPLAY H.
A (ASYNC): RS-232C port parameters
C (CHAR): Special TNC characters
H (HEALTH): Counter parameters
I (ID): ID parameters
L (LINK): TNC-to-TNC link status
M (MONITOR): Monitor parameters
T (TIMING): Timing parameters
DISPLAY
DISP
—
—
DWAIT
DW
30
0 ~ 250
ECHO
E
ON
ON/ OFF
OFF
The other station sends a notice (packet) to you if it is not
ready to receive data. When ON, receiving such a notice
ON/ OFF
causes the TNC to suspend transmission until it receives a
“ready” notice.
FIRMRNR
110
FIR
Specifies the interval from no carrier detection until
execution of transmission. The unit of the parameter is
10 milliseconds.
When ON, causes the TNC to echo received characters to
the computer.
21 APPENDIX
Command
Name
Short
Default
Parameter
FLOW
F
ON
ON/ OFF
When ON, starting key entry causes the computer to stop
displaying received packets.
FRACK
FR
3
0 ~ 250
Specifies the interval from one transmission until retry of
transmission. The unit of the parameter is 1 second.
HBAUD
HB
1200
1200/ 9600
Description
Selects 1200 or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between
packet stations.
KISS
KISS
OFF
Set the parameter ON, then switch the transceiver OFF.
Turn the transceiver ON again to enter KISS mode. When
the transceiver enters KISS mode, the “STA” and “CON”
ON/ OFF LEDs blink alternatively a few times. To exit KISS mode,
send the binary data C0 FF C0 to the TNC or turn the
transceiver OFF. The next time you turn the transceiver
ON, the TNC sets the parameter OFF automatically.
MCOM
MCOM
OFF
ON/ OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to also monitor control packets.
When OFF, causes it to monitor only information packets.
MCON
MC
OFF
ON/ OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to monitor other stations while
in connection with the target station.
MONITOR
M
ON
ON/ OFF When ON, causes the TNC to monitor packets.
MRPT
MR
ON
ON/ OFF
MYCALL
MY
NOCALL
PACLEN
P
128
When ON, causes the TNC to display the entire digipeat list
for monitored packets.
6
characters Specifies your call sign.
+ SSID
0 ~ 255
Specifies the maximum length of the data portion of a
packet.
EVERY/
If set to EVERY, sends a packet at intervals of the specified
AFTER n
period (n). If set to AFTER, sends a packet only once after
(n = 0 ~
the specified period (n). The unit of n is 100 milliseconds.
250)
PACTIME
PACT
AFTER 10
PERSIST
PE
128
0 ~ 255
PPERSIST
PP
ON
ON/ OFF
RESET
RESET
—
—
RESPTIME
RES
5
0 ~ 250
Specifies the acknowledgment packet transmission delay.
The unit of the parameter is 100 milliseconds.
RESTART
RESTART
—
—
Causes the TNC to function as if it is switched OFF then
ON.
RETRY
RE
10
0 ~ 15
SENDPAC
SE
$0D
0 ~ $7F
Specifies a parameter to calculate probability for the
PERSIST/SLOTTIME method.
Causes the TNC to use the PERSIST/SLOTTIME method
when ON, or the DWAIT method when OFF.
Restores the default status for all the commands.
Specifies the number of transmission retries. If packets are
not correctly accepted while in connection, a connect
request is sent again after the specified number of retries.
Specifies a character which forces a packet to be sent.
111
21 APPENDIX
Command
Name
Short
Default
Parameter
Description
SLOTTIME
SL
3
0 ~ 250
Specifies the period of random number generation intervals
for the PERSIST/SLOTTIME method. The unit of the
parameter is 10 milliseconds.
TRACE
TRAC
OFF
ON/ OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to display all received packets
in their entirety.
TRIES
TRI
0
0 ~ 15
Specifies the number of transmission retries programmed in
the retry counter.
TXDELAY
TX
50
0 ~ 120
Specifies the time delay between PTT ON and the start of
transmission. The unit of the parameter is 10 milliseconds.
UNPROTO
U
CQ
XFLOW
X
ON
Call1 (VIA Specifies call signs to send a packet in Unprotocol mode.
call2, call3, Call1 is the call sign of the destination. Call2 to call9 are
... call9) call signs of stations to be digipeated through.
ON/ OFF
Causes the TNC to perform software flow control when ON,
or hardware flow control when OFF.
Note:
◆ If you are using a PC with a communication program to control the built-in TNC, prepare the RS-232C cable (straight) to connect with the COM
terminal of the transceiver. Then, access Menu No. 56 and select the same communication speed and communications parameters. Other
than 4800 bps, the parameters must be set to 8-bit, 1-stop bit, and non-parity. 4800 bps is also used for the Quick Data Transfer function
{page 80} and the communication parameters are fixed as 8-bit, 2-stop bit, and non-parity.
◆ To use the above commands, you must operate the transceiver in Packet communication mode. The default operation mode is PC Control
Command mode {page 113}. To switch to Packet communication mode, either set Menu No. 55 to “ON” {pages 25, 49} or key in “TC 0”
{page 138}.
112
21 APPENDIX
COM CONNECTOR
CONTROL OPERATION
All descriptions in the PC CONTROL COMMAND
TABLE are for the users convenience only.
KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this
documentation in any way.
Most computers handle data in the form of “bits” and
“bytes”. A bit is the smallest piece of information that
a computer can handle. A byte is composed of eight
bits. This is the most convenient form for most
computer data. This data may be sent in the form of
either serial or parallel data strings. The parallel
method is faster but more complicated, while the
serial method is slower and requires less complicated
equipment. The serial form is, therefore, a less
expensive alternative.
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
This transceiver uses a full-duplex, asynchronous,
serial interface for communicating through the male
9-PIN RS-232C COM connector. Each data is
constructed with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit
(4800 bps must be configured as 2 stop bits). No
parity is used. The pinout and the pin functions of the
COM connector are shown below:
COM
9
5
8
4
7
3
Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of
the transceiver via the computer:
• Transmit data
• Receive data
• Ground
6
2
1
Rear panel view
COM COM Pin Name
Pin No. (Ref.: Computer)
Serial data transmission uses time-division methods
over a single line. Using a single line also offers the
advantage of reducing the number of errors due to
line noise.
Function
(Ref.: Transceiver)
I/O
1
NC
—
—
2
RXD
Transmit data
Output
3
TXD
Receive data
Input
4
NC
—
—
5
GND
Signal ground
6
NC
—
—
7
RTS
Receive enable
Input
8
CTS
Transmit enable
Output
9
NC
—
—
From a practical standpoint, it is also necessary to
incorporate some means of controlling when this data
transfer will occur. The computer and transceiver
cannot be allowed to send data at the same time!
The required control is achieved by using the RTS
and CTS lines.
For example, the transceiver is placed into the
transmit mode whenever the character string “TX;” is
sent from the computer. The character string “TX;” is
called a computer control command. It tells the
transceiver what to do. There are numerous
commands available for control of the transceiver.
These commands may be incorporated into a
computer program written in any high level language.
Programming methods vary from computer to
computer; therefore, refer to the instruction manuals
provided with the terminal program and computer.
RXD: Transmit data is serial data transferred from
the transceiver to the computer.
TXD: Receive data is serial data transferred from
the computer to the transceiver.
GND: Signal ground pin
RTS: This signal is applied to the transceiver. It is
used to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver
when the computer is not ready to receive data.
Transmit data is inhibited when the level is low.
CTS: This signal is applied from the transceiver. It
is used to inhibit transmit data from the computer
when the transceiver is not ready to receive data.
Transmit data is stopped when the level is low.
113
21 APPENDIX
■ Parameters
COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS
A computer control command is composed of an
alphabetical command, various parameters, and the
terminator that signals the end of the control
command.
EXAMPLE: Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz
FA
00007000000
;
Parameters are used to specify information
necessary to implement the desired command.
The parameters to be used for each command are
predetermined. The number of digits assigned to
each parameter is also predetermined. Refer to
the Computer Control Commands and the PC
Control Command Tables {page 115} to configure
the appropriate parameters.
When configuring parameters, be careful not to
make the following mistakes.
Terminator
Parameters
Alphabetical command
Commands can be classified as shown below:
Input
command
(Input to the
transceiver)
Computer
control
commands
Set command
(Sets a
particular condition)
Answer command
(Transmits a condition)
To set the frequency to 7 MHz, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
“FA00007000000;”
•
•
(Set command)
To read the frequency of VFO A, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
“FA;”
(Read command)
When the Read command above has been sent,
the following command is returned to the
computer:
“FA00007000000;”
IS+100;
Not enough digits
(Only three frequency digits given)
IS
+ 1000; Unnecessary characters between
parameters
Too many digits
(Five frequency digits given)
Note: If a particular parameter is not applicable to this
transceiver, the parameter digits should be filled using any
character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the
terminator (;).
To signal the end of a command, it is necessary to
use a semicolon (;). The digit where this special
character must appear differs depending on the
command used.
■ Error Messages
In addition to the Answer command, the
transceiver can send the following error
messages.
Error
Message
?;
(Answer command)
Note:
◆ Do not use the control characters 00 to 1Fh since they are either
ignored or cause a “?” answer.
◆ Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning
control rapidly.
◆ Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered from
the keypad.
■ Alphabetical Commands
A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters.
You may use either lower or upper case
characters. The commands available for this
transceiver are listed in the PC Control Command
Tables {page 115}.
114
Not enough parameters specified
(No direction given for the IF shift)
■ Terminator
For example, note the following in the case of the FA
command (Frequency of VFO A):
•
IS1000;
IS+10000;
Read command
(Reads an answer)
Output
command
(From the
transceiver)
(correct parameter: “IS+1000”)
Reason for Error
•
Command syntax was incorrect.
•
Command was not executed due to
the current status of the transceiver
(even though the command syntax
was correct).
Note: Occasionally this message may not
appear due to microprocessor transients in the
transceiver.
E;
A communication error occurred such
as an overrun or framing error during a
serial data transmission.
O;
Receive data was sent but processing
was not completed.
21 APPENDIX
PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES
AC
Se t
Read
Answer
AG
Set
Read
Answer
AI
Set
Read
Answer
AL
Set
Read
Answer
AM
Set
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the internal antenna tuner status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
C
P1
P2
P3
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
C
P1
P2
P3
;
Sets or reads the AF gain.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
G
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
G
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
G
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
Sets or reads the Auto Information (AI) function ON/ OFF.
1
2
3
4
A
I
P1
;
1
2
3
4
A
I
;
1
2
3
4
A
I
P1
;
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0: RX-AT THRU
1: RX-AT IN
P2
0: TX-AT THRU
1: TX-AT IN
P3
0: Stop tuning (Set)/ Tuning is stopped (Answer)
1: Start Tuning (Set)/ Tuning is active (Answer)
2: Tuning cannot be completed
Parameters:
P1
0: Main transceiver
1: Sub-receiver
P2
000 (min.) ~ 255 (max.)
Parameters:
P1
0: AI OFF
1: Only old AI format is ON
2: Only extended AI format is ON
3: Both formats are ON
When the extended AI format is selected, the transceiver
automatically sends the parameters.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Sets or reads the Auto Notch Ievel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
L
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
L
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the Auto Mode ON/ OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
M
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
M
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
000 ~ 004
Parameters:
P1
0: Auto Mode function is OFF
1: Auto Mode function is ON
115
21 APPENDIX
AN
Se t
Read
Answer
AR
Set
Read
Answer
AS
Selects the antenna connector ANT1/ ANT2.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
N
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
N
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
N
P1
;
Sets or reads the ASC function ON/ OFF.
Reports the status of the ASC function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
R
P1
P2
P3
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
R
P1
P2
P3
;
Sets or reads the Auto Mode function parameters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
S
P1
P2
P2
P3
P3
P3
P3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P4
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
S
P1
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
S
P1
P2
P2
P3
P3
P3
P3
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P4
;
Set
Read
Answer
BC
Set
Read
Answer
BD
Se t
2
3
4
B
C
P1
;
1
2
3
B
C
;
1
2
B
C
5
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
Moves down the frequency band.
1
2
3
B
D
;
1
2
1
2
116
Parameters:
P1
0: Beat Canceller OFF
1: Auto Beat Canceller ON
2: Manual Beat Canceller ON
Parameters:
None
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
0: Main transceiver
1: Sub-receiver
P2
0: ASC OFF
1: ASC ON
P3
0: Simplex contact is possible
1: Simplex contact is not possible
P2 parameter is valid only to “CTRL” band. When ASC
function is OFF, the response is unknown.
Parameters:
P1
0: HF ~ 50 MHz band
1: 144 MHz band
10
2: 430/ 440 MHz band
3: 1.2 GHz band
P3
P2
00 ~ 99
20
00 ~ 28: HF ~ 50 MHz band (28 points)
00 ~ 08: 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, 1.2 GHz band (8 points
for each band)
P3
10
Frequency in Hz (11-digit)
P4
0: Reserved
1: LSB
10
2: USB
3: CW
P3
4: FM
5: AM
6: FSK
20
7: CW-R
8: Reserved
9: FSK-R
Sets or reads the Beat Canceller function status.
1
Parameters:
P1
0: Reads the current antenna selection
1: Selects ANT1
2: Selects ANT2
21 APPENDIX
BP
Set
Read
Answer
BU
Set
Sets or reads the Manual Beat Canceller frequency settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
P
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
P
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
P
P1
P1
P1
;
Moves up the frequency band.
1
2
3
B
U
;
1
2
1
2
Parameters:
P1
000 ~ 063
Parameters:
None
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
BY
Reads the busy signal status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
Y
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
Y
P1
P2
;
Set
Read
Answer
CA
Se t
Read
Answer
CG
Se t
Read
Answer
When the Sky Command function is ON, only the P1
parameter is used.
Sets and reads the CW AUTO TUNE function status.
1
2
3
4
C
A
P1
;
1
2
3
C
A
;
1
2
C
A
Parameters:
P1
Main transceiver
0: Not busy
1: Busy
P2
Sub-receiver
0: Not Busy
1: Busy
5
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
Sets and reads the CARRIER GAIN status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
G
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
G
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
G
P1
P1
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: Cancels CW AUTO TUNING function/ Not active
1: Activates CW AUTO TUNING function/ Active
Parameters:
P1
000 (min.) ~ 100 (max.)
117
21 APPENDIX
CH
Se t
Sets the current frequency to the CALL channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
H
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0: Move the MULTI/ CH control 1 step up
1: Move the MULTI/ CH control 1 step down
Read
Answer
CI
Se t
Sets the current frequency to the CALL channel.
1
2
3
C
I
;
1
2
1
2
Parameters:
None
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
While in VFO mode or Memory recall mode, it sets the
frequency to the CALL channel.
Read
Answer
CM
Set
Read
Answer
CN
Set
Read
Answer
CT
Se t
Read
Answer
118
Sets or reads the PACKET CLUSTER TUNE function ON/
OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
M
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
M
P1
;
Sets and reads the CTCSS function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
N
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
N
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
N
P1
P1
;
2
3
4
C
T
P1
;
1
2
3
C
T
;
1
2
C
T
Parameters:
P1
01 ~ 38
Refer to page 35 for the CTCSS tone numbers.
Sets and reads the CTCSS function status.
1
Parameters:
P1
0: Packet Cluster Tune function OFF
1: Packet Cluster Tune function ON
5
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: CTCSS function OFF
1: CTCSS function ON
21 APPENDIX
DC
Se t
Read
Answer
DN
Se t
Sets and reads the TX band status.
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0: Sets TX band to the main transceiver
1: Sets TX band to the sub-receiver ON
P2
0: Sets CONTROL band to the main transceiver
1: Sets CONTROL band to the sub-receiver
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When the P1 parameter changes, the same parameter is set
to P2.
P2
;
10
Parameters:
P1
00 ~ 99
1
2
3
4
5
D
C
P1
P2
;
1
2
3
4
D
C
;
1
2
3
D
C
P1
Emulates the microphone DWN key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D
N
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
If no P1 paramter is specified, the command is interpreted as
1 step down.
In Memory mode and Quick Memory mode, the command
without a parameter is treated as a Memory channel down
command. With parameters, it is treated as the frequency
down command.
Answer
DQ
Set
Read
Answer
EX
Se t
Read
Answer
Sets and reads the DCS function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
Q
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
Q
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
Q
P1
;
Sets or reads the Extension Menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
X
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P3
P4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
X
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P3
P4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
X
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P3
P4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
P5
P5
P5
P5
P5
;
Parameters:
P1
0: DCS function OFF
1: DCS function ON
Parameters:
P1
000 ~ 999: Menu No. (1st)
10 P2
00 ~ 99: Menu No. (2nd)
P5 P3
0 ~ 9: Menu No. (3rd)
20
P4
0 ~ 9: Menu No. (4th)
P5
P5
A string of characters
30
(Variable length)
If the 2nd and 3rd menus are not available, set “00”.
Specify 1 digit only.
Display brightness:
;
EX00000000; (Dimmer OFF).
EX00000003; (Dimmer level 2).
10 Menu 29B, 31, 33, 51A ~ E, 59 and 62C have 2-digit
parameters.
P5 Menu 61C (P5): 000 ~ 999 (3-digit).
Menu 62A ~ B (P5): A maximum of 8 characters.
20 Menu 45A (P3): 0 ~ 9 for DTMF Memory channel number.
Menu 45A (P4): 0 (DTMF), 1 (Code)
P5
Menu 45A (P5): A maximum of 16 digits. If the first character
is a space character, the name will be cleared. 62A and 62B
30
become “NO CALL”.
Although you can turn Menu No. 55 ON, using the EX
command, you must use the TC 1; command to turn it OFF.
10
119
21 APPENDIX
Menu
No.
EX command parameter P5
Function
0
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
300
400
500
00
Display brightness
OFF
1
01
Key illumination
OFF
ON
02
Tuning control change per revolution
500
1000
Tuning with the MULTI/ CH control
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
03
04
05
Rounds off VFO frequencies
changed by using the MULTI/ CH
control
9 kHz frequency step size for the
MULTI/ CH control in AM mode on
the AM broadcast band
5
6
7
8
9
06A
Memory-VFO split operation
OFF
ON
06B
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory
channel frequencies
OFF
ON
07
Program scan partially slowed
OFF
ON
08
Slow down frequency range for the
Program scan
100
200
09
Program scan hold
OFF
ON
10
Scan resume method
TO
CO
11
Visual scan range
31
61
91
181
12
Beep output level
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13
TX sidetone volume
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
DRU-3A playback volume
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
VS-3 playback volume
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
6
7
8
9
16
17
18
Audio output configuration for
0
EXT.SP2 or headphone
Reverses the EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2
(the headphone jack L/R channels)
OFF
audio outputs
Enable an input from the HF RX ANT
OFF
connector
ON
ON
19A
S-meter squelch
OFF
ON
19B
Hang time for S-meter squelch
OFF
125
20
DSP RX equalizer
OFF
21
DSP TX equalizer
OFF
22
DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or
AM
23
24
250
2.2
Fine transmit power tuning
OFF
ON
Time-out Timer
OFF
3
25
Transverter frequency display
OFF
ON
26
TX hold when AT completes the
tuning
OFF
ON
27
In-line AT while receiving
OFF
O1N
OFF
1
2
OFF
1
2
OFF
1
2
OFF
1
2
OFF
1
2
29A
Repeat the playback
OFF
ON
29B
Interval time for repeating the
playback
0
1
30
Keying priority over playback
OFF
ON
120
500
H
B
CONVF PASS
BOOST
BOOST
EN
H
B
CONVF PASS
BOOST
BOOST
EN
2.0
Linear amplifier control delay for HF
28A
band
Linear amplifier control delay for
28B
50 MHz band
Linear amplifier control delay for
28C
144 MHz band
Linear amplifier control delay for
28D
430/ 440 MHz band
Linear amplifier control delay for
28E
1.2 GHz band
Over
USER
USER
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
5
10
20
30
3
4
5
2
~ 60
(in steps of 1)
21 APPENDIX
EX command parameter P5
Menu
No.
Function
31
CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone frequency
32
CW rise time
33
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio
34
35
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Over
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
~ 1000
(in steps of 50)
1
2
4
6
AUTO
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
~ 4.0
(in steps of 0.1)
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio
OFF
ON
Bug key mode
OFF
ON
36
Auto CW TX in SSB mode
OFF
ON
37
Frequency correction for changing
SSB to CW
OFF
ON
38
FSK shift
170
200
425
850
39
FSK keying polarity
NOR- INVEMAL
RS
40
FSK tone frequency
1275
2125
41
Mic gain for FM
LOW
MID
42
Sub-tone mode for FM
43
Auto repeater offset
OFF
ON
44
TX hold: 1750 Hz tone
OFF
ON
HIGH
BURST CONT
45A
DTMF number memory select
See the parameter comments.
45B
TX speed for stored DTMF number
SLOW FAST
Pause duration for stored DTMF
45C
number
100
250
45D Enable Mic remote control
OFF
ON
46
MAIN/ SUB band: Internal TNC
MAIN
SUB
47
Data transfer speed: Internal TNC
1200
9600
48
DCD sensing band
49A
Packet Cluster Tune mode
49B
Packet Cluster RX confirmation tone
50A
Packet filter bandwidth
50B
AF input level for Packet
MAIN band AF output level for
50C
packet operation
SUB band AF output level for packet
50D
operation
50E
MAIN/ SUB band: External TNC
50F
Data transfer speed: External TNC
TNC MAINBAND &SUB
MANAUTO
UAL
MOROFF
VOICE
SE
OFF
ON
0
1
0
1
0
1
MAIN
SUB
1200
9600
51D Microphone PF3 key
00 ~ 99 (2-digit)
0 ~ 62: Menu No., 63: VOICE1, 64: VOICE2, 65: RX MONI, 66: DSP MONI,
67: QUICK MEMO MR, 68: QUICK MEMO M.IN, 69: SPLIT, 70: TF-SET, 71: A/B, 72: VFO/M,
73: A=B, 74: SCAN, 75: M>VFO, 76: M.IN, 77: CW TUNE, 78: CH1, 79: CH2, 80: CH3,
81: FINE, 82: CLR, 83: CALL, 84: CTRL, 85: 1MHz, 86: ANT1/2, 87: NB, 88: N.R., 89: B.C.,
90: A. N., 99: No function
51E
All menu numbers may not be available (depending on the market code).
51A
Front panel PF key
51B
Microphone PF1 key
51C Microphone PF2 key
52
53
Microphone PF4 key
Split frequency transfer in master/
slave operation
Permit to write the transferred Split
frequencies to the target VFOs.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
54
TX inhibit
OFF
ON
55
Packet communication mode
OFF
ON
121
21 APPENDIX
Menu
No.
EX command parameter P5
Function
0
1
56
COM port communication speed
4800
9600
57
APO (Auto Power Off) function
OFF
60
58
59
60
Repeater mode select
OFF
61B
Repeater TX hold
OFF
61C Remote control ID code
5
ON
000 ~ 999 (3-digit number)
OFF
ON
61E
OFF
ON
External remote control
Commander callsign for Sky
Command II+
Transporter callsign for Sky
Command II+
62C Sky Command II+ tone frequency
A maximum of 9 characters. See page 83.
A maximum of 9 characters. See page 83.
See page 35 for the tone number.
Sky Command II+ communication
62D
speed
1200
9600
62E
OFF
CLIENT
122
4
LOCKCROSS
ED
Acknowledgement signal in external
61D
remote control mode
62B
3
FONT- FONTRC-2000 font in easy operation mode
1
2
RC-2000 panel/ TS-2000(X) dot1
2
matrix display contrast
NEGA- POSIDisplay mode for RC-2000
TIVE TIVE
61A
62A
2
Sky Command II+ mode
COM- T-PORMAND TER
6
7
8
9
Over
21 APPENDIX
FA
Set
Read
Answer
FB
Set
Read
Answer
FC
Set
Read
Answer
FD
Reads and sets the VFO A frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
A
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
Parameters:
P1
10 Specify the frequency in Hz (11-digit).
For example, 00014195000 for 14.195 MHz. The blank digits
P1 must be 0.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
A
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
A
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
;
Reads and sets the VFO B frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
B
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
Parameters:
P1
10 Specify the frequency in Hz (11-digit).
For example, 00014195000 for 14.195 MHz. The blank digits
P1 must be 0.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
B
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
B
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
;
Reads and sets the sub-receiver’s VFO frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
C
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Parameters:
P1
S
pecify the frequency in Hz (11-digit).
10
For example, 00144195000 for 144.195 MHz. The blank
P1 digits must be 0. If the invalid frequency step size is used in
the P1 parameter, the transceiver automatically sets the
20 nearest frequency.
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
C
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
;
Reads the filter display dot pattern.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Set
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
00000000 ~ FFFFFFFD (32-bit)
The filter width display has 30 dots.
MSB represents a dot on the left. The last 2 bits are
unused.
These bits are set to 0.
;
123
21 APPENDIX
FR
Se t
Read
Answer
FS
Set
Read
Answer
FT
Set
Read
Answer
FW
Set
Read
Answer
GT
Set
Read
Answer
124
Selects or reads the receiver VFO, M. CH or CALL/ COM.
1
2
3
4
F
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
F
R
;
1
2
3
4
F
R
P1
;
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0: VFO A
1: VFO B
2: M.CH
3: CALL
The command is applied to the current CTRL (Control) band.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selects or reads the FINE function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
S
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
S
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
S
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: FINE function OFF
1: FINE function ON
Selects or reads the transmitter’s VFO, M. CH or CALL/ COM. Parameters:
P1
0: VFO A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1: VFO B
2: M.CH
;
F
T P1
3: CALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The command is applied to the current TX band.
F
T
;
1
2
3
4
F
T
P1
;
5
6
7
8
9
10
Selects or reads the DSP receive filter width.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
W
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
W
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
W
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
8
9
10
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0000 ~ 9999 (in Hz)
CW: 50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1000, 2000
FSK: 250, 500, 1000, 1500
FM/AM: 0000=Narrow, 0001=Wide
In SSB mode, you cannot use the FW command. Use the SL
or SH command instead.
8
9
10
Selects or reads the AGC constant status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
T
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
G
T
P1
P1
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
000=OFF
001 (min.) ~ 020 (max.)
GT commands cannot be used in FM mode. The transceiver
responds with 3 spaces when the GT command is used in
FM mode.
21 APPENDIX
ID
Read
Answer
Reads the transceiver ID number.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I
D
P1
P1
P1
;
Retrieves the transceiver status.
IF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I
F
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I
F
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P3
P3
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
P3
P3
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P7
P8
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P14
P15
;
S et
Read
Answer
IS
Set
Read
Answer
KS
Se t
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
Specify the frequency in Hz. (11-digit)
The blank digits must be “0”.
10 P2
Frequency step size.
P3
RIT/ XIT frequency ±99999 in Hz
P4
0: RIT OFF, 1: RIT ON
10
P5
0: XIT OFF, 1: XIT ON
P6, P7: Specify the channel bank number. See MC
command.
P8
10
0: RX, 1: TX
P9
Operating mode. See MD commands for details.
P1
P10
See FR and FT commands.
20 P11
Scan status. See SC command.
P3 P12
Split operation status. See SP command.
P13
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: CTCSS, 3: DCS
30
P14
Tone frequency. See TN command.
P9 P15
Shift status. See OS command.
40
Sets and reads the IF SHIFT function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
S
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
S
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
I
S
P1
P2
P2
P2
9
10
8
9
10
7
8
9
10
P2
;
Sets and reads the keying speed of the electric keyer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
K
S
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
K
S
;
1
2
3
4
K
S
P1
P1
Parameters:
P1
019: TS-2000
7
8
9
10
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
While operating Sky Command II+, the P2 and P15
parameters become blank. The P2 parameter length
changes to 5 bytes and the P3 parameter length becomes 5
bytes.
Parameters:
P1
space
P2
0400 ~ 1000 (in steps of 50) in CW mode
IS commands cannot be used while in SSB, FSK, FM, or AM
mode.
Parameters:
P1
010 (min.) ~ 060 (max.) [in WPM]
125
21 APPENDIX
KY
Se t
Read
Answer
LK
Set
Read
Answer
LM
Se t
Read
Answer
LT
Set
Read
Answer
MC
Se t
Read
Answer
126
Converts the characters into Morse code.
Parameters:
P1
0: Character buffer is available
10
1: Character buffer is not available
P2 (Answer command only. A space is used for Set command.)
P2
20 Enter characters and numbers
P2 Available characters are:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ _ (space)
30 0123456789
"'()*+,–./:=?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
K
Y
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
K
Y
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
K
Y
P1
;
Sets and reads the key lock function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
K
P1
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
K
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
K
P1
P2
;
Sets and reads the DRU-3A unit or electric keyer recording
status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
M
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
M
P1
;
Sets and reads the ALT function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
T
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L
T
P1
;
Recalls or reads the Memory channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
C
P1
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
M
C
P1
P2
P2
;
7
8
9
10
7
8
9
10
7
8
9
10
The fixed 24-byte length is used for the P2 parameter.
_ (space) character must be used for the unused characters.
These space characters will not be not converted.
Parameters:
P1
0: Lock function OFF (TS-2000/ TS-B2000)
1: F.LOCK function ON (TS-2000/ TS-B2000)
2: A.LOCK function ON (TS-2000/ TS-B2000)
P2
0: LOCK function OFF (RC-2000)
1: LOCK function ON (RC-2000)
Parameters:
P1
0: Stop recording (Set command only)
0: Recording function is inactive
1: Start recording to CH1
2: Start recording to CH2
3: Start recording to CH3
Parameters:
P1
0: ALT function OFF
1: ALT function ON
Parameters:
P1
_ (space): No bank number
0 ~ 2: Memory bank number
P2
00 ~ 99: Channel number
Memory channel numbers from 00 to 99 are treated as
Memory bank 0. Memory channel numbers from 100 to 199
are treated as Memory bank 1. Memory channel numbers
from 200 to 299 are treated as Memory bank 2.
21 APPENDIX
MD
Set
Read
Answer
MF
Set
Read
Answer
MG
Set
Read
Answer
ML
Set
Read
Answer
MO
Set
Recalls or reads the operating mode status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
D
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
D
P1
;
Sets or reads Menu A or B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
F
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
F
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
F
P1
;
Sets or reads the Microphone gain status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
G
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
G
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
G
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the MONITOR function level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
L
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
L
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets the MONITOR function ON/ OFF in Sky Commander
mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
O
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
O
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
1: LSB
2: USB
3: CW
4: FM
5: AM
6: FSK
7: CR-R
8: Reserved
9: FSK-R
Parameters:
P1
0: Menu A
1: Menu B
Parameters:
P1
000 (min.) ~ 100 (max.)
Parameters:
P1
000: MONITOR OFF
001 (min.) ~ 009 (max.)
Parameters:
P1
0: MONITOR OFF
1: MONITOR ON
Read
Answer
127
21 APPENDIX
MR
Reads the Memory channel data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
R
P1
P2
P3
P3
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
R
P1
P2
P3
P3
P4
P4
P4
P4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P5
P6
P7
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P8
P8
P9
P9
P10
P10
P10
P11
P12
P13
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P14
P14
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P15
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
;
Set
Read
Answer
MU
Sets or reads the Memory Group data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M
U
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P9
P10
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M
U
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M
U
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P9
P10
;
Set
Read
Answer
128
Parameters:
P1
0: RX frequency, 1: TX frequency
P2, P3
Bank and channel number. See MC command.
P4
Frequency in Hz (11-digit).
P5
Mode. See MD command.
P6
Lockout status. 0: Lockout OFF, 1: Lockout ON.
P7
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: CTCSS, 3: DCS.
P8
Tone Number. See page 35.
P9
CTCSS tone number. See CN command.
P10
DCS code. See QC command.
P11
REVERSE status.
P12
SHIFT status. See OS command.
P13
Offset frequency. See OS command.
P14
Step size. See ST command.
P15
Memory Group number (0 ~ 9).
P16
Memory name. A maximum of 8 characters.
Memory channel 290 ~ 299:
P1=0 (start frequency), P1=1 (end frequency)
Parameters:
P1
Memory Group
10 P2
Memory Group
P8 P3
Memory Group
20 P4
Memory Group
P5
Memory Group
P6
10
Memory Group
P7
Memory Group
P8
10
Memory Group
P9
P8
Memory Group
P10
Memory Group
20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0: Unselected, 1: Selected
21 APPENDIX
MW
Store the data to the Memory channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M
W
P1
P2
P3
P3
P4
P4
P4
P4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P5
P6
P7
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P8
P8
P9
P9
P10
P10
P10
P11
P12
P13
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P13
P14
P14
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P15
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
P16
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Se t
Read
Answer
NB
Se t
Read
Answer
NL
Se t
Read
Answer
NR
Se t
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
0: RX frequency, 1: TX frequency
P2, P3
Bank and channel number. See MC command.
P4
Frequency in Hz (11-digit).
P5
Mode. See MD command.
P6
Lockout status. 0: Lockout OFF, 1: Lockout ON
P7
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: CTCSS, 3: DCS
P8
Tone Number. See page 35.
P9
CTCSS tone number. See CN command.
P10
DCS code. See QC command.
P11
REVERSE status.
P12
SHIFT status. See OS command.
P13
Offset frequency. See OS command.
P14
Step size. See ST command.
P15
Memory Group number (0 ~ 9).
P16
Memory name. A maximum of 8 characters.
Memory channel 290 ~ 299:
P1=0 (start frequency), P1=1 (end frequency)
Set or reads the NB (Noise Blanker) function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
B
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
B
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
B
P1
;
Set or reads the NB (Noise Blanker) level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
L
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
L
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the NR (Noise Reduction) function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
R
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
R
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: NB OFF
1: NB ON
Parameters:
P1
001 (min.) ~ 010 (max.)
000 is treated as 001.
010 ~ 999 are treated as 010.
Parameters:
P1
0: NR OFF
1: NR1 ON
2: NR2 ON
129
21 APPENDIX
NT
Se t
Read
Answer
OF
Se t
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the Auto Notch function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
T
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N
T
P1
;
Sets or reads the Offset frequency information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
O
F
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
Parameters:
P1
000000000 ~ 059950000 in steps of 50000
10
Offset frequency in Hz (9-digit).
Unused digits must be 0.
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
O
F
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
O
F
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
;
Reads the Memory channel data.
OI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
O
I
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
O
I
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P3
P3
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
P3
P3
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P7
P8
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P14
P15
;
Set
Read
Answer
130
Parameters:
P1
0: Auto Notch OFF
1: Auto Notch ON
Parameters:
P1
Specify the frequency in Hz (11 digits)
The blank digits must be “0”.
10 P2
Frequency step size
P3
RIT/ XIT frequency ±99999 in Hz
P4
0: RIT OFF, 1: RIT ON
10
P5
0: XIT OFF, 1: XIT ON
P6, P7: Specify the channel bank number. See MC
command.
P8
10
0: RX, 1: TX
P9
Operating mode. See MD commands for details.
P1
P10
See FR and FT commands.
20 P11
Scan status. See SC command.
P3 P12
Split operation status. See SP command.
P13
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: CTCSS, 3: DCS
30
P14
Tone frequency. See TN command.
P9 P15
Shift status. See OS command.
40
While operating Sky Command II+, the P2 and P15
parameters become blank. The P2 parameter length
changes to 5 bytes and the P3 parameter length becomes 5
bytes.
21 APPENDIX
OS
Set
Read
Answer
PA
Se t
Read
Answer
PB
Set
Read
Answer
PC
Set
Read
Answer
PI
Set
Sets or reads the offset function status.
1
2
3
4
O
S
P1
;
1
2
3
4
O
S
;
1
2
3
4
O
S
P1
;
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
0: Simplex
1: +
2: –
3: = (All E-types)
Valid only in FM mode. SPLIT function must be OFF.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Sets or reads the pre-amplifier function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
A
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
A
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
A
P1
P2
;
Sets or reads the DRU-3A or electric keyer playback status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
B
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
B
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
B
P1
;
Sets or reads the output power.
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
C
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
C
P1
P1
P1
;
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Parameters:
P1
0: Pre-amplifier OFF (main transceiver)
1: Pre-amplifier ON (main transceiver)
P2 (Answer only)
0: Pre-amplifier ON (sub-receiver)
1: Pre-amplifier OFF (sub-receiver)
If same frequency band is selected for the main transceiver
and the sub-receiver, both pre-amplifiers are turned ON or
OFF at the same time.
Parameters:
P1
0: Inactive
1: Playback CH1
2: Playback CH2
3: Playback CH3
Parameters:
P1
005 ~ 100 (in steps of 1)
Refer to the Specifications for the minimum and maximum
power for each operating frequency band and mode.
If the power is less than 1 watt, the next power level is used.
ex: 2.5 W = 003, 0.5 W= 001
7
8
9
10
Stores in the Programable Memory channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
I
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
1 ~ 5 (PM channel number)
Read
Answer
131
21 APPENDIX
PK
Reads the Packet Cluster data.
Parameters:
This command is used in conjunctin with the AI command.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
K
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Set
Read
Answer
P1
Frequency in Hz (11-digit)
P2
Callsign (12-digit)
P3
Comments (20-digit)
P4
Time (5-digit)
;
PL
Set
Read
Answer
PM
Set
Read
Answer
PR
Se t
Read
Answer
132
Sets and reads the Speech Processor input/ output level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
L
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
L
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
Recalls the PM (Programmable Memory).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
M
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
M
P1
;
Sets or reads the Speech Processor function ON/ OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
R
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
R
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
Input level:
000 (min.) ~ 100 (max.)
P2
Output level:
000 (min.) ~ 100 (max.)
Parameters:
P1
0: PM OFF
1 ~ 5 (PM channel number)
Parameters:
P1
0: Speech Processor OFF
1: Speech Processor ON
21 APPENDIX
PS
Set
Read
Answer
QC
Set
Read
Answer
QI
Set
Sets or reads the Power ON/ OFF status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
S
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
S
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
S
P1
;
Sets or reads the DCS code.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
C
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
C
P1
P1
P1
;
Store the settings in the Quick Memory.
1
2
3
Q
I
;
1
2
1
2
Parameters:
P1
0: Power ON
1: Power OFF
Parameters:
P1
All available 103 DCS codes are numbered sequentially
from 000 to 103.
ex.: 000: 023 (DCS code) ••• 103: 754 (DCS code)
Parameters:
None
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
QR
Set
Read
Answer
RA
Se t
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the Quick Memory channel data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
R
P1
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
R
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q
R
P1
P2
;
Sets or reads the Attenuator function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
A
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
A
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
A
P1
P1
P2
P2
;
Parameters:
P1
0: Quick Memory OFF
1: Quick Memory ON
P2
0 ~ 9: Quick Memory channel number
Parameters:
P1
00: ATT OFF
01 ~ 99: ATT ON
If same frequency band is selected for the main transceiver
and the sub-receiver, both attenuators are turned ON or OFF
at the same time.
133
21 APPENDIX
RC
S et
Clears the RIT offset frequency.
1
2
3
R
C
;
1
2
1
2
Parameters:
None
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
RD
Se t
Read
Answer
RG
Set
Read
Answer
RL
Se t
Read
Answer
RM
Set
Read
Answer
134
Move the RIT offset frequency down.
Slow down the scan speed in Scan mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
D
P2
;
Sets or read the RF gain status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
G
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
G
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
G
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the Noise Reduction level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
L
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
L
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the Meter function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
M
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
M
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
;
Parameters:
P1
00000 ~ 99999 (the offset frequency in Hz)
P2
1 ~ 9: Scan speed
When Scan is OFF:
If no parameter is specified, the frequency goes down 1 step.
When Scan is ON:
RD; to read the current scan speed.
RDnnnnn; (nnnnn = Any number) to slow the scan speed
1 step.
Parameters:
P1
000 (min.) ~ 255 (max.)
Parameters:
P1
When the NR1 is ON: 00 = AUTO, 01 ~ 09
When the NR2 is ON: 00 (2 ms) ~ 09 (20 ms) in steps of
2 ms
Parameters:
P1
Selects the meter scale
0: Unselected
1: SWR
2: COMP
3: ALC
P2
Meter value in dots: 0000 ~ 0030
21 APPENDIX
RT
Set
Read
Answer
RU
Set
Read
Answer
RX
S et
Sets or reads the RIT function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
T
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
T
P1
;
Moves the RIT offset frequency up.
Speed up the scan speed in Scan mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
U
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
U
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
U
P2
;
Sets the receiver function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
X
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
X
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: RIT function OFF
1: RIT function ON
Parameters:
P1
00000 ~ 99999 (the offset frequency in Hz)
P2
1 ~ 9: Scan speed
When Scan is OFF:
If no parameter is specified, the frequency goes 1 step up.
When Scan is ON:
RU; to read the current scan speed.
RUnnnnn; (nnnnn = Any number) to speed the scan speed
1 step up.
Parameters:
P1
0: Main transceiver
1: Sub-receiver
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the Satellite mode status.
SA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
A
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
A
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
A
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
;
Set
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
0: Satellite mode OFF
1: Satellite mode ON
10 P2
0 ~ 9: Satellite Memory Channel number
; P3
0: Main transceiver (uplink)/ Sub-receiver (downlink)
1: Main transceiver (downlink)/ Sub-receiver (uplink)
10 P4
0: CTRL is on the main transceiver
1: CTRL is on the sub-receiver
P5
0: TRACE OFF, 1: TRACE OFF
10 P6
0: TRACE REV. OFF, 1: TRACE REV ON
P7
P8
0: MULTI/ CH control (VFO mode)
1: MULTI/ CH control (Memory channel)
20 P8
Satellite Channel name (8 characters)
Use the FA (downlink) or FB (uplink) command to change the
frequencies.
135
21 APPENDIX
SB
Se t
Read
Answer
SC
Set
Read
Answer
SD
Set
Read
Answer
SH
Set
Read
Answer
SI
Se t
Sets or reads the SUB, TF-W status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
B
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
B
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
B
P1
;
Sets or reads the SCAN function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
C
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
C
P1
;
Sets or reads the CW break-in time delay.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the DSP filter settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
H
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
H
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
H
P1
P1
;
Enters the Satellite memory name.
136
Parameters:
P1
0: Scan OFF
1: Scan ON
2: MHz Scan ON
3: Visual Scan ON
4: Tone Scan ON
5: CTCSS Scan ON
6: DCS Scan ON
Parameters:
P1
0000 ~ 1000 ms (in steps of 50 ms)
0000 is FBK (Full break-in)
Parameters:
P1
00 ~ 11
SSB/ FM (Hz)
00: 1400, 01: 1600, 02: 1800, 03: 2000, 04: 2200, 05: 2400,
06: 2600, 07: 2800, 08: 3000, 09: 3400, 10: 4000, 11: 5000
AM (Hz)
00: 2500, 01: 3000, 02: 4000, 03: 5000
When the Packet Filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON,
00: 170 Hz, 01: 1930, 02: 2160, 03: PSK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
I
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Parameters:
P1
0 ~ 9 (Channel number)
10
P2
Satellite memory channel name
P2
(A maximum of 8 characters)
20
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
Parameters:
P1
0: SUB (TF-W) OFF
1: SUB (TF-W) ON
21 APPENDIX
SL
Set
Read
Answer
SM
Sets or reads the DSP filter settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
L
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
L
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
L
P1
P1
;
Reads the S-meter status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
M
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
M
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
;
Set
Read
Answer
SQ
Set
Read
Answer
SR
Set
Sets and reads the squelch level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
Q
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
Q
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
Q
P1
P2
P2
P2
;
Resets the transceiver.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
00 ~ 11
SSB/ FM (Hz)
00: 10 (0), 01: 50, 02: 100, 03: 200, 04: 300, 05: 400, 06: 500
07: 600, 08: 700, 09: 800, 10: 900, 11: 1000
AM (Hz)
00: 10 (0), 01: 100, 02: 200, 03: 500
When the Packet Filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON,
00: WIDE, 01: NAR
Parameters:
P1
0: Main transceiver
1: Sub-receiver
2: Main transceiver S-meter level
3: Sub-receiver S-meter level
P2
Meter readings
0000 ~ 0030 (Main transceiver)
0000 ~ 0015 (Sub-receiver)
Parameters:
P1
0: Main transceiver
1: Sub-receiver
P2
Squelch level
000 ~ 255
Parameters:
P1
1: VFO reset
2: Master reset
Read
Answer
SS
Se t
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the Program Scan pause frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
S
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
S
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
S
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: Reserved
1: Set
2: All clear
When selecting memory channel 290 ~ 299, use the DN or
UP command to set the frequency. Then, use this command
to set the Program Scan pause frequency.
Using the IF command, you can read the current frequency.
137
21 APPENDIX
ST
Se t
Read
Answer
SU
Sets or reads the MULTI/ CH control frequency steps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
T
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
T
P1
P1
;
Sets or reads the Program Scan pause frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
U
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P9
P10
P11
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
U
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
U
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
P9
P10
P11
;
Set
Read
Answer
SV
Se t
Parameters:
P1
0: Program Scan group
1: Memory Scan group
10
P2
P8 Group 0. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P3
20 Group 1. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P4
Group 2. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P5
Group 3. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
10
P6
Group 4. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P7
Group 5. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
10 P8
Group 6. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P8 P9
Group 7. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
20 P10
Group 8. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
P11
Group 9. 0: Unselected, 1 ~ 9: Selected
Execute the Memory Transfer function.
1
2
3
S
V
;
1
2
1
2
Parameters:
P1
SSB/ CW/ FSK mode: 00 ~ 03
00: 1 kHz, 01: 2.5 kHz, 02: 5 kHz, 03: 10 kHz
AM/ FM mode: 00 ~ 09
00: 5 kHz, 01: 6.25 kHz, 02: 10 kHz, 03: 12.5 kHz,
04: 15 kHz, 05: 20 kHz, 06: 25 kHz, 07: 30 kHz,
08: 50 kHz, 09: 100 kHz
Parameters:
No parameter
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read
Answer
TC
Se t
Read
Answer
138
Sets or reads the internal TNC mode.
1
2
3
4
5
T
C
P1
P2
;
1
2
3
4
5
T
C
;
1
2
3
4
5
T
C
P1
P2
;
6
7
8
9
10
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
_ (space) is used
P2
0: Packet communication mode
1: PC Control command mode
Key in “TC 0” to enter Packet communication mode.
Key in “TC 1” to return to PC Control command mode.
6
7
8
9
10
21 APPENDIX
TD
Se t
Sends the DTMF memory channel data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
D
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
00 ~ 09 (DTMF memory channel number)
If no data is stored in the channel, no data is sent.
Read
Answer
TI
Reads the TNC LED status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
I
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
I
P1
P2
P3
;
Set
Read
Answer
TN
Se t
Read
Answer
TO
Se t
Read
Answer
TS
Set
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the sub-tone frequency.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
N
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
N
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
N
P1
P1
;
2
3
4
T
O
P1
;
1
2
3
T
O
;
1
2
T
O
5
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
Sets or reads the TF-SET function status.
1
2
3
4
T
S
P1
;
1
2
3
T
S
;
1
2
T
S
Parameters:
P1
01 ~ 39
Refer to page 35 for the tone numbers.
Sets or reads the TONE function ON/ OFF.
1
Parameters:
P1
0: 9.6k LED is OFF, 1: 9.6k LED is ON
P2
0: STA LED is OFF, 1: STA LED is ON
P3
0: CON LED is OFF, 1: CON LED is ON
5
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: TONE OFF
1: TONE ON
2: Emulates switching TONE ON (Set only)
3: Emulates switching TONE OFF (Set only)
Parameters:
P1
0: TF-SET OFF
1: TF-SET ON
When the transceiver is operating in simplex mode.
P1
0: REVERSE ON
1: REVERSE OFF
Every time you send TS1; the REVERSE function toggles.
139
21 APPENDIX
TX
Se t
Sets the transceiver in TX mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
X
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
X
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: Transmits on the main transceiver’s frequency band
1: Transmits on the sub-receiver’s frequency band
Read
Answer
TY
Sets or reads the microprocessor fimware type.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
Y
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T
Y
P1
P1
P2
;
Se t
Read
Answer
UL
Detects the PLL unlock status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U
L
P1
;
Set
Parameters:
P1
Reserved
P2
0: Overseas type
1: Japanese 100 W type
2: Japanese 20 W type
Parameters:
P1
0: Lock
1: Unlock
Read
Answer
UP
Set
Emulates the microphone UP key.
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
00 ~ 99
1
2
3
4
5
U
P
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If no P1 parameter is specified, the command is interpreted
as 1 step up.
In Memory mode and Quick Memory mode, commands
without parameters are treated as Memory channel up
commands. With parameters, they are treated as frequency
up commands.
Parameters:
P1
0000 ~ 3000 ms (in steps of 150)
Read
Answer
VD
Set
Read
Answer
140
Sets or reads the VOX delay time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
D
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
D
P1
P1
P1
P1
;
21 APPENDIX
VG
Set
Read
Answer
VR
Set
Sets or reads the VOX GAIN.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
G
P1
P1
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
G
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
G
P1
P1
P1
;
Emulates the VOICE1 or VOICE2 key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
R
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parameters:
P1
000 ~ 009
Parameters:
P1
0: VOICE1
1: VOICE2
Read
Answer
VX
Set
Read
Answer
XT
Se t
Read
Answer
Sets or reads the VOX function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
X
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
X
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
V
X
P1
;
Sets or reads the XIT function status.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X
T
P1
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X
T
;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X
T
P1
;
Parameters:
P1
0: VOX OFF
1: VOX ON
Parameters:
P1
0: XIT OFF
1: XIT ON
141